2017-Pacifica Chrysler Manuel

2017
OWNER’S MANUAL
Pacifica
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA features and equipment that are either standard or op-
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. description of features and equipment that are no longer
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of disregard any features and equipment described in this
accidents. manual that are not on this vehicle.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non- ments to its products without imposing any obligation
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans- upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
portation. factured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2015 FCA US LLC
SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
1
2 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 2
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 3
4 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 4
5 SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 5
6 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 6
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 7
8 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611 8

9 TECHNICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673 9
10 MULTIMEDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691 10
11 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797 11
12 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805 12
INTRODUCTION 1
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 ▫ Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
▫ Essential Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .6
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman- your satisfaction.
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis- Essential Information
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. contains the information you desire.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc- items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
tions and recommendations in this manual will help illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- Symbols
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold. Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision or WARNING!
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce- Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau- death.
tions.
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
CONTENTS
䡵 FRONT VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 䡵 INTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
䡵 REAR VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
8 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
FRONT VIEW
Front View
1 — Hood/Engine Compartment 4 — Doors
2 — Windshield 5 — Wheels/Tires
3 — Exterior Mirrors 6 — Headlights
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 9
REAR VIEW
Rear View
1 — Rear Lights
2 — Rear Windshield Wiper
3 — Liftgate
10 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1 — Air Vents 5 — Glove/Storage Compartment
2 — Multifunction Lever 6 — Ignition
3 — Instrument Cluster 7 — Steering Wheel
4 — Windshield Wiper Lever 8 — Headlight Switch
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 11
INTERIOR
Interior Features
1 — Power Window/Door Lock Switches 5 — Door handle
2 — Electronic Gear Selector 6 — Climate Control
3 — Uconnect Radio 7 — Center Console
4 — Switch Panel 8 — Seats
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS 3
䡵 KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 ▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ RKE Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Remote Start Comfort Systems — If
䡵 IGNITION SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF
▫ Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Activation — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped . . .33
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
䡵 SENTRY KEY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . .38
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 ▫ Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) . . . . . . . . . . .59
䡵 DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 ▫ Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) . . . . . . . . . . .63
▫ Manual Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 ▫ Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
▫ Central Lock/Unlock — If Equipped. . . . . . . . .43
▫ Power Adjustment (Rear Seats) — If Equipped .87
▫ Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 ▫ Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .90
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry . . . . . . . .44 ▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
▫ Manual Sliding Side Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 ▫ Ventilated Seats — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped . . . . . .50 ▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Hands-Free Sliding Doors – If Equipped . . . . . .54 䡵 HEAD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Safe Lock Device — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .55 ▫ Head Restraints — Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
▫ Child Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 ▫ Head Restraints — Second Row . . . . . . . . . . .100
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 ▫ Head Restraints — Third Row . . . . . . . . . . . .100
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
▫ Power Folding Third Row Head Restraints — If ▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
䡵 STEERING WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 ▫ Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped. . . . . . .108
▫ Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . .101 ▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .109 3
▫ Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped . . . . . .102 ▫ Conversation Mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 䡵 EXTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . .104 ▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .105 ▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .111
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 ▫ Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped . . .112
▫ Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If ▫ Headlight Delay — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .112
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . .106
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .113
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .106
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .113
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .107
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 ▫ Windshield Washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 ▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Lane Change Assist — If Equipped . . . . . . . .115 ▫ Rear Wiper And Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 ▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .122
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Automatic High Beam — If Equipped . . . . . . .115 ▫ Manual Climate Controls – 3 Zone — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Battery Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) – 3 Zone
䡵 INTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
▫ Courtesy/Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ Instrument Panel Dimmer Control . . . . . . . . .118
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS . . . . . .120
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
䡵 TRI-PANE VISTA VIEW SUNROOF — IF
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
▫ Opening Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 ▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ Closing Sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 ▫ Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 ▫ Cargo Area Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
3
▫ Power Sun Shade — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .156 䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED. . . .175
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 ▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . .176
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 ▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .180
▫ Ignition OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 ▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
䡵 HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 ▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
▫ Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 ▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
▫ Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 ▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 䡵 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
▫ Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 ▫ Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
▫ Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 ▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .192
▫ Sun Screens — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 ▫ Overhead Storage With Sunglass Storage . . . .200
▫ Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . .201
▫ Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .197 ▫ Deploying The Crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ Cigar Lighter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 ▫ Stowing The Crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped . . . . . . .199
KEYS NOTE: The emergency key allows for entry into the
vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE Key
The keyless ignition system consists of a Key Fob with
Fob go dead. The emergency key is also for locking/
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter (RKE Key Fob)
unlocking the glove compartment. You can keep the
with a built in emergency key and a keyless push button
emergency key with you when valet parking. 3
Ignition system.
RKE Key Fob
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate, and activate the Panic Alarm, optional power
liftgate, left power sliding door, and right power sliding
door from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
using a hand-held RKE Key Fob. The RKE key fob does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
Three Button RKE Key Fob

Four Button RKE Key Fob Five Button RKE Key Fob
Six Button RKE Key Fob Seven Button RKE Key Fob
General Information To Unlock The Doors
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio NOTE: Uconnect Settings lets you program the system
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: to unlock either the driver’s side doors on the first push
(default) or unlock all doors on the first push of the
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob. To change the
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: default setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” for further information.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
2. This device must accept any interference received,
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE Key
including interference that may cause undesired op-
Fob once to unlock the front and rear driver doors or
eration.
twice within five seconds to unlock all doors liftgate. The
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved hazard lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal.
by the party responsible for compliance could void the The illuminated entry system will be activated.
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
2nd Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE Key
Fob twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and
liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge
3
the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will be
activated.
First Push Unlock
Second Push Unlock

This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry,
refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Get-
ting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
Emergency Key Feature
The RKE Key Fob also contains and an emergency key,
which stores in the bottom of the RKE Key Fob. Mechanical Latch To Release Emergency Key
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE Key Fob go
dead. The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking
the glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, press the mechanical Key Fob With Remote Control And Integrated Vehicle
button on the side of the RKE Key Fob with your thumb Key
and pull the emergency key out with your other hand
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is open, the
while pushing the mechanical button.
doors will lock. This is signaled by a quick flash of the
turn signals. 3
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE Key Fob Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
to lock all doors and liftgate. The hazard lights will flash Entry
once and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the
signal. Settings in radio can change to lights only, chirp If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is open, the
doors will lock. The doors will unlock again only if the
only, or both.
key is inside the passenger compartment.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Getting To
Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by pushing the mechani-
cal release button on the side of the RKE Key Fob with
Emergency Key Removal
your thumb and then pull the key out with your other
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
hand.
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the RKE Key Fob apart. Make sure not to damage
the plastic mechanical attachment points.
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE Key Fob case, snap the two
3
halves together.
Programming Additional Transmitters
If you do not have a programmed RKE Key Fob, contact
your authorized dealer for details.
Request For Additional Remote Controls
NOTE: Only RKE Key Fobs that are programmed to the
Separating The RKE Key Fob Case
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
vehicle. Once a RKE Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle,
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System
CAUTION!
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and dealer.
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat- KeySense Features — If Equipped
tended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, This feature provides the vehicle owner with the ability
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF to identify a specific vehicle key for which a customized
position. category of vehicle settings can be applied to determine
the driving experience for other drivers of the vehicle.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided The vehicle settings are protected by a unique 4-digit
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). PIN, which the vehicle owner creates when accessing the
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is specific settings for the first time.
required for authorized dealer replacement of RKE Key
Fobs. Duplication of RKE Key Fobs may be performed at This feature also has additional features that are always
an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of pro- enabled when the specific key is in use that cannot be set
gramming a blank RKE Key Fob to the vehicle electron- by the vehicle owner. While this specific RKE Key Fob is
ics. A blank RKE Key Fob is one that has never been in use, the vehicle will respond accordingly to the cus-
programmed. tomized vehicle settings and mandatory features. This
includes enhanced driving assistance features, increased
driver alerts, and the locking of certain optional features.
Start Up Display Features
• Unique splash screen graphic
• Telltale illuminated
3
• After unique splash screen, and after stored messages
are cycled, then start-up KeySense messages (Range &
Max Speed) are displayed.
The following features are always enabled when this key
is in use:
• Entertainment Audio Muted if 1st row occupied Seat
KeySense RKE Key Fob Belts are not Fastened
KeySense Unique Splash Screen • Consistent Seat Belt Unfastened Chime
At start-up the KeySense splash screen should inform the • Maximum Radio Volume limited to 15 out of 39
driver that the vehicle will be functioning in KeySense
• Daytime Running Lights
mode when the KeySense key is in use.
For additional information please refer to “Uconnect
Settings” located in “Multimedia.”
IGNITION SWITCH
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button, as long as the RKE Key
Fob is in the passenger compartment, and the drivers foot
on the brake pedal.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
RUN will illuminate.
Keyless Push Button Ignition

The ignition can be placed in the following positions:
OFF
• The engine is stopped.
• Some electrical devices are available.
ACC
• The engine is stopped.
• Some electrical devices are still available.
3
ON/RUN
• Driving position.
• All the electrical devices are available.
START
• Start the engine.
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push Keyless Push Button Ignition
of a button, the RKE Key Fob may have a low or dead NOTE: The vehicle will not start if the RKE Key Fob is
battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to located inside the cargo area AND the liftgate is opened.
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side
opposite of the emergency key) of the RKE Key Fob
against the ENGINE START/STOP button and push to
operate the ignition switch.
WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key • Do not leave children or animals inside parked
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with cause serious injury or death.
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is CAUTION!
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil- An unlocked car is an invitation. Always remove the
dren should be warned not to touch the parking Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. leaving the vehicle unattended.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or NOTE: For further information, refer to ⬙Starting Proce-
in a location accessible to children, and do not dures⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating.⬙
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
(Continued)
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the instrument
This system uses the RKE Key Fob to start the cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote
engine conveniently from outside the vehicle start prematurely:
while still maintaining security. The system has 3
• Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
a range of 328 ft (100 m).
• Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
The Remote Starting System also activates the Climate
Control, vented seats (if equipped) in temperatures above • Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
80° F (26.7° C), and the optional heated seats, and
• Remote Start Cancelled — Liftgate Open
optional heated steering wheel in temperatures below
40° F (4.4° C). • Remote Start Cancelled — Too Cold
NOTE: • Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic • Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
The message will stay active until the ignition is placed in
• Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE Key Fob the ON/RUN position.
may reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start • Ignition in STOP/OFF position
All of the following conditions must be met before the • Fuel level meets minimum requirement
engine will remote start:
• Gear Selector in PARK WARNING!
• Doors closed • Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or

confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
• Hood closed oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
• Liftgate closed Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in-
jury or death when inhaled.
• Hazard switch off • Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed) away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
• Battery at an acceptable charge level could cause serious injury or death.
• RKE PANIC button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
To Enter Remote Start Mode To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the REMOTE START button Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or
on the RKE Key Fob twice within five seconds. allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
The vehicle doors will lock, the turn signals 3
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will flash twice, and the horn will chirp twice.
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
Then the engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
Start request.
NOTE:
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds. UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob to unlock the
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during doors, or unlock the vehicle using Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Remote Start mode. Passive Entry via the door handles, and disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped). Then, prior to the
• For security, power window operation is disabled end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release the START/
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode. STOP button.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter- Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer
N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Activation — If Equipped
Start Active — Push Start Button” will display in the 3.5” When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
EVIC or 7” DID until you push the START button. temperature is less than 40° F (4.4° C), the Windshield
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped Wiper De-Icer will be enabled. Exiting Remote Start will
resume previous operation, except if the Windshield
When Remote Start is activated, the Climate Control,
Wiper De-Icer is active. The Windshield Wiper De-Icer
vented seats (if equipped) are also activated in tempera-
timer and operation will continue.
tures above 80° F (26.7° C), and the optional heated seats,
and optional heated steering wheel in temperatures General Information
below 40° F (4.4° C).. These features will stay on through The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
the duration of Remote Start or until the ignition switch Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
is cycled to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: The Remote Start Comfort System can be acti- with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
vated and deactivated through the Uconnect Settings. For Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
more information on Remote Start Comfort System op-
eration, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia.” 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will
including interference that may cause undesired op- shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid Key Fob
eration. is used to start the engine.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN posi-
3
by the party responsible for compliance could void the tion, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
user’s authority to operate the equipment. seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
SENTRY KEY electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor- the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The RKE Key Fob to start the engine. Either of these condi-
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation tions will result in the engine being shut off after two
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked seconds.
or unlocked. If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
The system uses Key Fob with factory-mated Remote vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter (RKE Key Fob) to pre- seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron-
vent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
RKE Key Fob that are programmed to the vehicle can be as possible by an authorized dealer.
will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash,
CAUTION!
and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat- will flash.
ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Rearming Of The System
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection. If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
All of the RKE Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle off after 29 seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 8
have been programmed to the vehicle electronics. cycles if the trigger remains active and then the Vehicle
Security Alarm will rearm itself.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
To Arm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau- Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
thorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the 1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF”
interior switches for door locks, power sliding doors and position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting
power liftgate are disabled. The Vehicle Security Alarm And Operating⬙ for further information).
provides both audible and visible signals. If something
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will pro-
Passive Entry, make sure the vehicle ignition system
vide the following audible and visible signals: the horn
is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the • Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
vehicle: equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch Entry⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know Your Vehicle⬙ for further
with the driver and/or passenger door open. information).
• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry • Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF 3
Door Handle with a valid RKE Key Fob available in position.
the same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
— Passive Entry⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know Your Vehicle⬙ Passive Entry, push the keyless ignition START/
for further information). STOP button (requires at least one valid RKE Key
• Push the LOCK button on the RKE Key Fob. Fob in the vehicle).
3. If any doors are open, close them. NOTE:
To Disarm The System • The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of on the RKE Key Fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
the following methods: Security Alarm.
• Push the UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob. • The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will
not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
door, the alarm will sound. remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your DOORS
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the Manual Lock
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether trim panel forward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, lock button until the ribbing is visible. To unlock the rear
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. doors, rotate the door lock button until the ribbing is
visible.
Manual Front Door Lock location Manual Door Lock Rocker Switch
1 — Manual Door Lock
2 — Door Handle
If the door lock button is locked (no ribbing is visible)
when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore,
make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before
closing the door.
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock
the liftgate.
NOTE:
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
Manual Rear Door Lock location • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
1 — Door Handle parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
2 — Manual Door Lock when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the key-
less ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, remove the
Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the 3
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle. Driver Power Door Lock Switches
Central Lock/Unlock — If Equipped 1 — Unlock Power Switch
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim 2 — Lock Power Switch
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any front door
is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents
you from accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle. For further information, refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in
Placing the ignition in the OFF position or closing the “Multimedia”.
door will allow the locks to operate. A chime will sound
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
if the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position and a
door is open, as a reminder to remove the RKE Key Fob. The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
If you push the power door lock switch while the sliding
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to
door is open, the sliding door will lock.
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit — If push the RKE key fob lock or unlock buttons.
Equipped
NOTE:
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature unlocks
all of the vehicle doors when any door is opened. This • Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF, dis-
will occur only after the gear selector has been placed abling passive entry will also disable the hands free
into the PARK position, after the vehicle has been driven sliding doors and liftgate closures. Refer to “Uconnect
(the gear selector has been placed out of PARK and all Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
doors closed). • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature will not raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
operate if there is any manual operation of the power sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re-
door locks (lock or unlock). sponse time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
and if equipped will arm the security alarm.
• If the child safety locks have been engaged the sliding
3
side doors can be unlocked from the outside using the
hands free RKE or Passive Entry system.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid RKE key fob within 3ft (1 m) of the drivers
door handle, grab the drivers front door handle to unlock
the drivers side doors (driver/sliding door) automati-
cally. The interior door panel rocker knob will rotate
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
when the door is unlocked.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed,
all doors and liftgate will unlock when you grab hold of
the driver’s front door handle. To select between “Unlock
Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,”
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side: FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with Passive Entry.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe
With a valid RKE key fob within 3 ft (1 m) of the
search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door
handle to unlock all four doors and the liftgate automati- • A lock request is made by a valid RKE key fob while a
cally. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when door is open.
the door is unlocked.
• A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger handle while a door is open.
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
• A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
the door is open.
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of RKE key fob In
are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
finds a RKE key fob inside the car, and it does not find
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a any RKE key fob outside the car, then the car will unlock
RKE key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry and alert the customer.
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock
feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the
OFF position.
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a To Enter The Liftgate
valid RKE key fob is detected inside the vehicle, and no
With a valid RKE key fob within 3 ft (1 m) of the liftgate,
valid RKE key fob is detected outside the vehicle. The cycle the handle to open the liftgate and pull the liftgate
vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the
open with one fluid motion.
following conditions are met: 3
NOTE: If “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” is pro-
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock grammed, only the liftgate will unlock when the liftgate
knobs.
release handle is pushed. If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”
• There is a valid RKE key fob outside the vehicle and is programmed, all doors and the liftgate will unlock
within 3 ft (1 m) of either Passive Entry door handle. when the liftgate release handle is pushed. To select
between “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
door panel switch and then close the doors. media” for further information.
NOTE: On the third attempt ALL doors will lock and
the RKE key fob can be locked in the vehicle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door
With one of the vehicle’s RKE key fobs within 3 ft (1 m) handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
of the driver or passenger front door handle, push the
door handle LOCK button to lock all four doors and the
liftgate.
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock

NOTE: rocking forward and back. Rocking the handle back-
wards opens the door and rocking forward releases the
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
hold open latch in order to close the door.
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to To keep your door operating properly, observe the fol-
3
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling lowing guidelines:
the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and • Always open the door smoothly.
unlocking.
• Avoid high impacts against the door stop when open-
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE ing the door. This is very important when your vehicle
transmitter battery is dead. is parked on an incline as the door will slide faster in
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE the downhill direction.
transmitter lock button, or the lock button located on the
• There is a hold-open latch that is activated when the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
sliding door is fully opened. This latch will keep your
Manual Sliding Side Door sliding door open on any incline. To close the sliding
door after the hold-open latch is activated, you must
The sliding door may be opened from the inside or the
rock the inside handle forward or pull outward on the
outside. Pull outward on the exterior handle to open the
exterior handle.
sliding door. The sliding door inside handle functions by
Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latched Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped
anytime the vehicle is in motion.
NOTE: The left side sliding door cannot be opened while
the fuel door is open.
Side Door Handle And Lock Functions

1 — Door Handle
2 — Door Lock
The power sliding door may be power opened or closed The RKE Key Fob and the overhead console button will
in several ways: operate the door when the door is locked. All other ways
require the sliding door to be unlocked. If the vehicle is
• RKE key fob
equipped with Passive Entry, pressing the button on the
• inside or outside handles outside handle or Hands-Free feature (if equipped) will 3
unlock and open the sliding door, with a valid Passive
• the following buttons located
Entry RKE Key Fob within 3ft (1m) of the door handle.
• in the overhead console
• just inside the sliding door NOTE: Opening or closing the hands free sliding door (if
equipped) requires a valid RKE key fob within 3 ft (1 m)
• on the outside handle
of the door handle. If Passive Entry is turned off in the
• Hands-Free Sliding Doors — If Equipped Uconnect Settings this feature will not be functional.
Using any of the above ways: To operate the sliding door manually with the handles or
to avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding
• when the door is fully closed, the door will open.
doors from the rear seats, push the power sliding door
• when the door is fully open, the door will close. power Off button, located in the overhead console, to
remove power to the handles and buttons just inside the
• when the door is moving, the door will reverse.
sliding doors. The power OFF LED, in the overhead
Push the button on the RKE key fob twice within five console, will be lit when the handles are manual. When
seconds to open, close, or reverse a power sliding door.
the LED is lit, pushing the power sliding door power OFF
button will return the handles to power operation.
NOTE: Tones are sounded and the turn signals are
flashed with sliding door movements. These alerts can be
turned on or off in ‘Uconnect Settings’.
There are power sliding side door switches located on the
B-Pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding door
for the rear seat passengers.
Driver Side Power Sliding Side Door Switch

power Off button, located in the overhead console, to
remove power to the handles and buttons just inside the
sliding doors.
NOTE:
3
• The sliding door will not power open or close if the
gear selector is not in Park or Neutral.
• If anything obstructs the power sliding side door while
it is closing or opening, the door will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
Passenger Side Power Sliding Side Door Switch • If the power sliding door encounters multiple obstruc-
If the inside or outside door handles are used while the tions within the same cycle, the system will automati-
power sliding side door is activated, the power sliding cally stop. If this occurs, the power sliding door must
door will reverse direction. be opened or closed manually.
To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding
doors from the rear seats, push the power sliding door
Hands-Free Sliding Doors – If Equipped
WARNING!
Hands-Free Feature
Personal injury or cargo damage may occur if caught
in the path of the sliding door. Make sure the door
path is clear before closing the door.
WARNING!
Before driving off, check the instrument cluster for a
sliding door or door open message or warning indi-
cator. Failure to do this could result in unintention-
ally leaving the sliding door open while driving.
Hands-Free Sliding Doors

To open or close the Hands-Free Sliding Doors, use a
gentle single forward and back kicking motion under the
vehicle in the general location below the door handle(s). • If anything obstructs the power sliding doors while it
Do not move your foot sideways or in a sweeping motion is closing or opening, the sliding doors will automati-
or the sensors may not detect the motion. cally reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
NOTE: To open or close the Hands-Free Sliding Doors
3
requires a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 3 ft • If the power sliding doors encounters multiple ob-
(1 m) of the door handle. If a valid Passive Entry RKE structions within the same cycle, the system will
Key Fob is not within 3 ft (1 m), the door will not respond automatically stop. If this occurs, the liftgate must be
to any kicks. opened or closed manually.
NOTE: The Hands-Free Sliding Doors feature may be Safe Lock Device — If Equipped
turned off through Uconnect Settings. Refer to “Uconnect To provide a safer environment for small children riding
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information. The in the rear seats, the second row sliding door switches
Hands-Free Sliding Doors feature should be turned off may be overridden by pushing the OFF side of the Power
during Jacking, Tire Changing, and Service. Switch located in the front overhead console.
NOTE: When the power sliding door power switch is in the OFF
• The sliding doors will not power open or close if the position, the power sliding side door may not be opened
gear selector is in gear or the vehicle speed is above or closed by pushing the switch located on the B-Pillar
0 mph (0 km/h). trim panel, just in front of the sliding door or activating
the inside power sliding door handle.
Child Locks
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the sliding doors are equipped with a
Child Protection Door Lock system.
NOTE: When the Child Safety Locks have been engaged
the sliding side doors can be unlocked from the outside
using the hands free RKE or Passive Entry system.
To Engage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. On the rear of the sliding door, slide the Child
Overhead Console Buttons
Protection Door Lock control inward (toward the
1 — Liftgate vehicle) to engage the Child Protection Door Lock.
2 — Right Sliding Door
3 — Power Door Power Off
4 — Left Sliding Door
NOTE:
• After engaging (or disengaging) the Child Protection
Door Lock, always test the inside door handle with the
sliding door closed to make certain the Child Protec-
3
tion Door Lock is in the desired position. The inside
door handle will not open the sliding door when the
Child Protection Door Lock is engaged.
• The power sliding door will operate from the switch
located just inside the sliding door, regardless of the
Child Protection Door Lock lever position. To avoid
unintentional operation of the power sliding door
Child Protection Door Locks from the rear seats, push the power sliding door
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door. power Off button, located in the overhead console, to
remove power to the handles and buttons just inside
the sliding doors. The power Off LED, in the over-
head console, will be lit when the handles are
manual and the buttons just inside the sliding doors
are disabled. When the overhead console power OFF
LED is lit, the sliding door may not be power opened 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door.
or closed by pushing the buttons just inside the sliding
NOTE:
doors or pulling on the handles.
• After disengaging (or engaging) the Child Protection
WARNING! Door Lock, always test the inside door handle with the
sliding door closed to make certain the Child Protec-
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision. tion Door Lock is in the desired position. The inside
Remember that the sliding doors can only be opened door handle will open the sliding door when the Child
from the outside door handle or the switches located Protection Door Lock is disengaged.
on the B-Pillar trim panel just in front of the power
sliding door when the Child Protection Door Locks SEATS
are engaged.
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
To Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock vehicle.
1. Open the sliding side door. WARNING!

2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control outward
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
(away from the vehicle) to disengage the Child Pro-
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
tection Door Lock.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

these areas are more likely to be seriously injured adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
or killed. the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your • Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the 3
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
more likely to be seriously injured or killed. belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
using a seat belt properly.
Manual Front Adjuster
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats)
Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The
manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat
WARNING! cushion at the front edge of each seat.
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
(Continued)
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped

Manual Seat Adjuster
For models equipped with manual seats, the recline lever
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide is located on the outboard side of the seat.
the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you
have reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then push
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched. 3
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Manual Recline Lever
Seat Height Adjustment
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by
using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat.
Pump the lever upward to raise the seat height, or pump
the lever downward to lower the seat height.
1 — Seat Height Adjustment Lever

2 — Recline Lever
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is 3
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Recline Lever
Manual Recline
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then push
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Fold-Flat
To fold the seat, lift the recliner lever to the full upward
position and push the seatback forward until it rests on
the seat cushion.
Fold-Flat Seat Recline Lever
NOTE:
• The seatback may lock into the fold flat position. Use
the recline lever to unlock the seatback.
• When returning the seat to the original position, the Easy Entry
headrest must be folded back to the original position.
Easy Tilt Seat — With Or Without Child Seat Installed
The 2nd row seats can be tilted forward for easy entry
into the third row with or without a child seat installed. 3
1. Located in the seatback of the second row seat is a
handle that provides easier access to the third row by
tilting the seat forward.
Fold Headrest To Upward Position

Easy Tilt Seat Lever Seat Folded Forward With Child Seat Installed
2. To put the seat back into original position, just pull
back on the seatback and lock the seat into position.
WARNING!
Do not use this feature with a child in seat. Serious
injury or death my occur.
3
Easy Entry — With The Seat Folded Flat
The seats can be folded and tilted for more accessibility
for passengers to enter and exit the third row.
1. Without a child seat installed, you can fold the seat by
pulling the recliner handle on the bottom part of the
seat. Before pulling the recliner lever, make sure the
arm rests are folded up. Recliner Lever
2. Pull the strap on the back of the seat and the seat will
tilt forward.
Exit For 3rd Row Passengers
For passengers seated in the third row, there is a pull
strap located on the outboard side of the seat near the
bottom of the seat back. Third row passengers can pull on
the strap and push the seat forward for folding the
seatback down and tilting the seat to the floor.
Pull Strap
3. To put it back into position, pull back on the folded
seat and make sure that it locks into position. Then
pull the seatback toward the back and fold down the
arm rests.
Pull Strap For Third Row Passengers

NOTE: This process is for when there is no child seat The Stow ‘n Go Assist feature is available to both the
installed. Use the easy entry lever if a child seat is front driver and passenger power seats.
installed.
Stow ’n Go Seating
WARNING!
3
On vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go seating, the During power seat operation, personal injury or
second and third row seats can be folded into the floor for cargo damage may occur. Ensure the front seat is not
convenient storage. occupied and the seat travel path is clear.
Stow ‘n Go Assist — If Equipped A one-touch Stow ‘n Go Assist button is located on the

On vehicles equipped with the Stow ‘n Go Assist feature, B-pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding door.
the front seat will move forward automatically to a
location that will allow the second row Stow ‘n Go seat
movement, without interference by the front seat. After
the second row Stow ‘n Go seat movement is completed,
the front seat will automatically move back to the previ-
ous location once the Stow ‘n Go Assist button is pushed
again.
Using the Stow ‘n Go Assist Feature
NOTE:
• The button is only functional when the power sliding
door is open and the vehicle is in PARK. If the door is
not open or the vehicle is not in PARK when the button
is pushed, the front seat will not move and a message
will be displayed in Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Drivers Information Display (DID).
• If the power sliding door is closing when the button is
pushed, the front seat will not move and a message
Stow ‘n Go Assist button will be displayed in the EVIC or DID.
1. Push and release the Stow ‘n Go Assist button. The
front seat cushion and seat back will move as neces-
sary to a location that will allow space for the second
row Stow ‘n Go seat movement.
2. Perform the second row Stow ‘n Go seat movement. location. A message will be displayed in the instru-
Refer to “Second Row Stow ‘n Go” for further infor- ment cluster indicating that an obstacle has been
mation. detected.
3. Push and release the Stow ‘n Go Assist button a • If the front seat is already in a location that will allow
3
second time. The front seat cushion and seat back will space for Stow ‘n Go of the second row seat, the front
return to the original starting location. seat will not move and a message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
• If calibration of the front seat is lost, the seat will
• To abort seat operation while seat is in motion, press
automatically re-calibrate when the Stow ‘n Go Assist
the Stow n’ Go Assist button, or press the front power
button is pushed. This may result in the seat cushion
seat button to stop the seat movement. Pushing the
moving forward and downward, before moving to the
Stow ‘n Go Assist button again will return the front
location that will allow space for the second row Stow
seat to the original starting location.
‘n Go seat movement.
• The Stow ‘n Go Assist system includes obstacle detec-
Second Row Stow ’n Go
tion. When the system detects an obstacle, the seat will
stop, reverse direction, and return to the previous For Manual Seats: To stow the seat in the floor, move the
front seat all the way forward using the manual seat
adjustment bar. Move the seat back all the way forward
using the recliner handle located on the outboard side of
the cushion. Move the seat height to at least mid position
using the height adjuster handle in the outboard side of
the cushion.
For Power Seats: Push the Stow ‘n Go Assist button
located on the B pillar trim (if equipped.) Refer to ⬙Stow
’n Go Assist - If Equipped⬙ in this section for instructions.
1. To access the storage bin, place the lock rod in the
locked position.
Lock Rod
NOTE:
• Push the lock rod inward for the locked position.
• Pull outward on the lock rod for the unlocked
position.
• For information on storage bin function with the 3. Pull the floor panel and position it toward the front
seats rearward refer to “Second Row Floor Storage seats while folding the top half down and rest it
Bins” in “Internal Equipment” for further informa- against the front seats.
tion.
3
2. Pull the latch located near the second row seat to open
the floor panel.
Push Panel Forward
Floor Latch
4. Stow the seat by grabbing the strap on the lower part 5. Push down on the seat back to lock the seat in the tub.
of the back seat and guide the seat into the tub.
Push To Lock
Pull Strap
6. Close the floor by pulling the floor panel backwards
by the bottom corner edge of the panel.
Push To Lock
8. Readjust the front seat as needed.
Extend Floor Panel
7. Push down on floor panel to lock into place.
To Unstow Second Row Seats
CAUTION!
For Manual Seats: To unstow the seat from the floor,
• The storage bin cover must be locked and flat to move the front seat all the way forward using the manual
avoid damage from contact with the front seat seat adjustment bar.
tracks, which have minimal clearance to the cover.
• Do not sit on the second row seat when it is in the For Power Seats: Push the Stow ‘n Go Assist button
stowed position with the seatback upright other- located on the B pillar trim (if equipped). Refer to ⬙Stow
wise damage to the seat may occur. ’n Go Assist - If Equipped⬙ in this section for instructions.
1. To access the storage bin, place the lock rod in the
WARNING! locked position.
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched:
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open.
• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
the floor panel.
Lock Rod
NOTE:
• Push the lock rod inward for the locked position. Floor Latch
3. Pull the floor panel and position it toward the front
• Pull outward on the lock rod for the unlocked seats while folding the top half down and rest it
position. against the front seats.
NOTE: The seatback may be locked, if it is, it will be
necessary to use the recliner handle to unlock the back
before folding into the upright position.
Push Panel Forward

4. Pull the strap located on the seat and pull the seat out
of the storage bin. Push the seat rearward making sure
that it locks into the floor. Fold the seatback into the
upright position and pull the headrest up. Pull Strap
5. To position the floor panel back into its original state,
grab the bottom corner and extend it outward.
Extend Panel Push Down To lock

6. Lay the floor panel flat and push down until it clicks 7. Readjust the front seat as needed.
into position. Replace the floor mat as needed.
WARNING!
• In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could
be injured if seats are not properly latched to their
floor attachments. Always be sure the seats are
fully latched.
• Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Always make sure the head
restraints are in their upright positions when the
seat is to be occupied.
Second Row Removable 8th Seat — If Equipped Second Row 8th Seat Fold Flat Strap
While the 8th seat does not stow in the floor, it is foldable The release strap is located on the front of the seat, near
and removable for added cargo space. the floor. To remove the seat, pull the release strap to
release the rear latches. The seat assembly can now be
removed from the vehicle by moving it in a rearward
direction from the detent positions in the floor.
Release Strap In Floor Detent Guides

NOTE: Seat can be removed easier with one outboard
WARNING!
seat stowed in the load floor.
If not properly latched, the seat could become loose.
To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the detent posi-
Personal injuries could result.
tions on the floor. Tilt seat rearward to lock the seat back
into its original position.
Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If Equipped 3. Pull release strap marked “2” and tumble the seat
rearward into the storage bin.
1. Lower the center head restraint down to the seatback
by pushing the button on the guide and pushing the
head restraint down.
2. Pull release strap marked “1” to release the anchors.
Strap “2”
Release Strap “1”

2. Pulling strap “2” releases the seatback to return to its
full upright position.
Stowed Third Row Seat

To Unfold Third Row Seats
Strap “2”
1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the
storage bin and push the seat forward until the 3. Raise the head restraint to its upright position.
anchors latch.
WARNING!
• In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could
be injured if seats are not properly latched to their
floor attachments. Always be sure the seats are
fully latched.
• Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Always make sure the head
restraints are in their upright positions when the
seat is to be occupied.
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped Driver Power Seat Switches

Some models may be equipped with eight-way power 1 — Seat Switch
seats for the driver and front passenger. The power seat 2 — Seatback Switch
3 — Lumbar Switch
switches are located on the outboard side of the seat. The
switches control the movement of the seat cushion and
the seatback.
WARNING! CAUTION!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Do not place any article under a power seat or
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
control which could cause a collision and serious the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if 3
injury or death. movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat path.
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
seat belt. The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat when the desired position has been reached.
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
CAUTION! (Continued)
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front path.
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached. WARNING!
Reclining The Seatback • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or control which could cause a collision and serious
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward, injury or death.
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
the switch when the desired position is reached. belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
CAUTION! seat belt.
Do not place any article under a power seat or • Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
WARNING! (Continued)
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
may be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar seat belt.
switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat. • Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or 3
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
downward to raise or lower the lumbar support. belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
Power Adjustment (Rear Seats) — If Equipped
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
control which could cause a collision and serious movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
injury or death. path.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
(Continued)
Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped
The power recline feature, located on the trim panel next
to the seat, adjusts the seatback angle forward/rearward
for occupant comfort.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push and hold the forward or rearward button,
the seat will move in the direction of the button press.
Release the button when the desired position is reached.
Third Row Power Seat Switch

Third Row Power Stow ‘n Go Seat — If Equipped
A one-touch power folding seat switch is located in the
right rear trim panel as part of a switch bank.
NOTE:
• The outer head restraints will lower automatically as
necessary when the power seat begins to move.
• The center head restraint raises and lowers manually 3
but will not lower automatically.
• The head restraint can also be lowered manually using
the pull strap located at the back off the seat. Refer to
⬙Head Restraints - Third Row⬙ in ⬙Head Restraints⬙ for
further information.
The switch is only functional when the liftgate is open
and the vehicle is in PARK. Rear Panel Power Switch Bank
The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding and 1 — Open To Normal 3 — Fold Forward/Rearward
2 — Stow 4 — Right/Left Seats/Both Seats
unfolding positions for the third row seats.
Left and right third row seats can be folded individually
or together. The third row power folding seat adjusts to
the following positions using the switch bank located on
the left rear trim panel:
To move the selected seat(s) to the Normal (seated) • To abort seat operation while seat is in motion, push a
position, push and release the Normal button. The seat different seat position selector switch to stop the seat.
will automatically stop when the Normal position is Once the seat stops moving, then the desired position
reached. can be selected.
To move the selected seat(s) to the stow position, push • The third row power seat system includes obstacle
and release the Stow button. The seat will automatically detection. When the system detects an obstacle, the
stop when the Stow position is reached. motors will stop and reverse direction. Should this
occur, remove the obstacle before pushing the button
To move the selected seat(s) back in the forward or
again.
reverse direction, push and hold the Fold forward or
rearward button. Release the button when the desired Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped
position is reached. The Memory Buttons 1 and 2 on the driver’s door panel
NOTE: can be programmed to recall the driver’s seat, outside
mirrors, and radio station preset settings. Your Remote
• Disconnect the center shoulder belt from the small Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fobs can also be programmed
buckle before attempting to fold/stow the power third to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is
row seats. pushed.
Your vehicle may have been delivered with two RKE key
fobs, one RKE key fob can be linked to each of the
memory positions.
Programming The Memory Feature
3
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the ON/RUN position
(do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., driver’s seat, outside mirrors and radio
station presets).
Driver Memory Switch
3. Push and release the S (Set) button on the memory
1 — Memory Button 1 switch.
2 — Set Button
3 — Memory Button 2 4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Dis- NOTE: Before programming your RKE Key Fob you
play (DID) will display which memory position has must select the “Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob”
been set. feature through the Uconnect Settings. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
NOTE:
mation.
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
To program your RKE Key Fob, perform the following:
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory profile. 1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
• To set a memory profile to your RKE Key Fob, refer to 2. Select a desired memory profile (1) or (2).
“Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer
Key Fob To Memory” in this section.
to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ in this section for
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry instructions on how to set a memory profile.
Key Fob To Memory
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release
Your RKE Key Fob can be programmed to recall one of the SET (S) button on the memory switch.
two pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the
4. Push and release button (1) or (2) accordingly.
UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob.
“Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the
instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE Key A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the MEMORY
Fob within 10 seconds. buttons on the driver’s door during a recall (S, 1, or 2).
When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat stop moving.
NOTE: Your RKE Key Fob can be unlinked to your
A delay of one second will occur before another recall can
memory settings by pushing the SET (S) button, and
be selected. 3
within 10 seconds, followed by pushing the UNLOCK
button on the RKE Key Fob. NOTE: Pushing the mirror adjust switch will cancel the
memory mirror recall.
Memory Position Recall
Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory Seat
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
Only)
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the EVIC or This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
DID. enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
To recall the memory settings for driver one, push
MEMORY button 1 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
button on the RKE Key Fob linked to memory position 1. you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the
key from the ignition switch.
To recall the memory setting for driver two, push
MEMORY button 2 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK • When the ignition switch transitions to the LOCK
button on the RKE Key Fob linked to Memory Position 2. position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches
(60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the Entry and Easy Exit Position.
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be enabled
position when the ignition switch transtions out of the
or disabled through the programmable features in the
LOCK position.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
• When the ignition switch transitions out of the LOCK Information Display (DID). For further information refer
position, the driver seat will move to a position 0.3 to “Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
inches (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the driver Panel”.
seat position is between 0.9 – 2.7 inches (22.7 – 67.7
Heated Seats — If Equipped
mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its
previously set position when the ignition switch tran- Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
sitions out of the LOCK position. The front heated seats control buttons are located within
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
driver seat position is less than 0.9 inches (22.7 mm) You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. The
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
or Easy Entry. LO and none for OFF.
• Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI • The engine must be running for the heated seats to
setting ON. operate.
• Press the heated seat button a second time to turn Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
the LO setting ON.
On models that are equipped with remote start, the 3
• Press the heated seat button a third time to turn heated seats can be programmed to come on during a
the heating elements OFF. remote start.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will auto- This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
matically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 min- system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
utes of continuous operation. At that time, the display further information.
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after ap- WARNING!
proximately 45 minutes.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
NOTE: because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
two to five minutes. tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
(Continued)
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
ture of the seat.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped

On some models, the second row seats are equipped with Second Row Heated Seat Switch
heaters. There are two heated seat switches that allow the You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber
second row passengers to operate the seats indepen- indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
dently. The heated seat switches are located on the sliding use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
side door handle trim panels. LO and none for OFF.
Push the switch once to select HI-level heating. Push the air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help
switch a second time to select LO-level heating. Push the keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher
switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF. ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds,
HI and LO.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located 3
within two to five minutes.
within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of • Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.
operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal • Press the ventilated seat button a second time to
HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will choose LO.
automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60
minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the dis- • Press the ventilated seat button a third time to
play will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. turn the ventilated seat OFF.
The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
approximately 45 minutes. seats to operate.
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the first row seat cushions are small fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment and move
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start HEAD RESTRAINTS
On models that are equipped with remote start, the Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
remote start. impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information. WARNING!
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly installed and adjusted prior to operating the
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should
handles are built into the seatbacks of the first and third never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.
row rear seats. The floor supports the partial weight of Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly
the bagged goods. adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
four-way head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head 3
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint. Front head re-
straints are also adjustable forward and rearward.
NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go then push the release button and the adjustment
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
Front Head Restraint
restraint up. Seatback angle may need to be adjusted to
fully remove the head restraint. To reinstall the head 1 — Release Button
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and 2 — Adjustment Button
push downward. Then adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
Head Restraints — Third Row
WARNING!
The outboard head restraints can be manually folded
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a colli- forward for improved visibility while in reverse. Pull the
sion or hard stop could cause serious injury or release strap to fold them forward.
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely
stow removed head restraints in a location outside
the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the re-installation instructions above prior to oper-
ating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
Head Restraints — Second Row

The second row outboard head restraints are non-
adjustable. The removable 8th passenger seat (if
equipped) has an adjustable head restraint.
Release Strap
NOTE: Press the Head Restraint Fold button to power fold
the third row head restraints.
• The head restraints must be raised manually when
occupying the third row. NOTE:
• Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the third • The head restraints can be folded downward using the 3
row seats. Head Restraint button or using the manual release
strap. The head restraints must be raised manually
The head restraint in the center position can be raised and
when occupying the third row.
lowered for tether routing or height adjustment. Refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Safety” for further informa- • Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the third
tion. row seats.
Power Folding Third Row Head Restraints — If STEERING WHEEL
Equipped
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
For improved visibility, the third row outboard head
restraints can be folded using the Uconnect System. This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
Press the “Controls” button located on the bottom of the shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
Uconnect display. located left of the steering wheel at the end of the steering
column.
steering column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped

Tilt/Telescoping Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering steering wheel has been turned on it can operate for up to
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the approximately 120 minutes before automatically shutting
off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may
not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located
WARNING!
within the Uconnect controls screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button once to • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
turn the heating element ON. because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus- 3
• Press the heated steering wheel button a second tion, or other physical conditions must exercise
time to turn the heating element OFF. care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
steering wheel to operate. used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
On models that are equipped with remote start, the wheel covers of any type and material. This may
heated steering wheel can be programed to come on cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
during a remote start. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is used to allow the driver to
adjust up, down and left, right. Mirror should be ad-
justed to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Manual Rearview Mirror

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pushing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when 3
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is in
reverse.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will auto-
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) matically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight mirror adjusts.
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror. Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
WARNING! forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex three detent positions:
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they • Full forward position
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or • Full rearward position
other object. Use your inside mirror when judging • Normal position
the size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
mirror. Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side
Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
door trim panel.
Equipped
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Left and Right side power mirror preselected positions
can be controlled by the optional Driver Memory Seat 3
Feature. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Seats” for
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This

feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
Power Mirror Controls
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Climate
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but- Controls” for further information.
tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) to select the Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
mirror that you want to adjust. Seat Only) — If Equipped
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted. positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. The driver’s outside Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in,
mirror will move slightly downward from the present pushing the switch a second time will return the mirrors
position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The to the normal driving position.
driver’s outside mirror will then return to the original
position when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
position. Each stored memory setting will have an asso-
ciated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not enabled
when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver’s
Information Display (DID). Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
Power Folding Mirror Switch
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right). NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h) the folding feature will be disabled.
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
speed is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor.
will automatically unfold. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors the mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automati-
cally. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights. 3
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
following occurs:
• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/
unfolded.
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving
speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold them
by pushing the button. (this may require multiple button
pushes). This resets them to their normal position. Illuminated Mirror
Conversation Mirror EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Located in the overhead console there is a conversation Headlight Switch
mirror to view all the passengers in the vehicle. Push the
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
panel to release the drop down mirror. Raise the mirror
instrument panel. The switch controls the operation of
and push to latch it back in the stowed position.
the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights,
interior lights and the fog lights.
Conversation Mirror
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the second
detent for parking light and instrument panel light
operation. Rotate the headlight switch to the third detent
for headlight, parking light and instrument panel opera-
tion. 3
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns your headlights on or off
based on ambient light levels. To turn the system on, turn
the headlight switch to the extreme clockwise position
aligning the indicator with the AUTO on the headlight
switch. When the system is on, the Headlight Time Delay
Headlight Switch feature is also on. This means your headlights will stay
1 — Rotate Headlight Switch on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch
2 — Ambient Dimmer Control OFF. To turn the Automatic System off, turn the headlight
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer switch counterclockwise to the O (OFF) position.
4 — Fog Lamps Button
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the Automatic mode.
Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped headlights or parking lights are turned back on or the
ignition switch is turned ON, the delay will be cancelled.
When your headlights are in the AUTO mode and the
engine is running, the headlights will automatically turn When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to have
on when the wiper system is also turned on. Headlights the headlights remain on for 30, 60 or 90 seconds or not
on when windshield wipers are on may be found on remain on. To change the timer setting, select the proper
vehicles equipped with an automatic headlight system. setting through the Uconnect System.
NOTE: The Headlights with Wipers feature can be Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
turned on or off through the Uconnect system. Refer to information.
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor- If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they
mation. will turn off in the normal manner.
Headlight Delay — If Equipped NOTE: The headlights must be turned off within 45
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination seconds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this
for up to 90 seconds after exiting your vehicle. feature.
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch Lights-On Reminder
while the headlights are still on. The 90 second delay If the headlights or the parking lights are left on after the
interval begins when headlight switch is turned off. If the ignition switch is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
the driver’s door is opened.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The headlights or LED light bars on your vehicle will
illuminate when the engine is started. This provides a
constant lights on condition until the ignition is turned
OFF. If the parking brake is applied, the Daytime Run- 3
ning Lights (DRL) will turn off. Also, if a turn signal is
activated, the DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle
will turn off for the duration of the turn signal activation.
Once the turn signal is no longer active, the DRL lamp
will illuminate.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
Fog Lights Switch
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights
or the low beam headlights and push in the headlight Multifunction Lever
switch control knob. Pushing the headlight switch con- The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
trol knob in a second time will turn the front fog lights steering column. The multifunction lever controls the
off. turn signals, headlight beams and flash-to-pass func-
tions.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Turn Signal Warning
Multifunction Lever If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
1 — Turn Signals
traveled at over 18 mph (29 km/h) for about 1 mile
2 — Headlight Beams Low/High (1.6 km) with the turn signals on, a chime will sound and
3 — Flash-To-Pass a message will display in the cluster to alert the driver.
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped Automatic High Beam — If Equipped
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond The Automatic High Beam system provides increased
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash forward lighting at night by automating high beam
three times then automatically turn off. control through the use of a digital camera mounted on
the windshield. This camera detects vehicle specific light 3
High/Low Beam Switch
and automatically switches from high beams to low
When the headlights are turned on, pushing the multi- beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
function lever toward the instrument panel will switch
from low beams to high beams. Pulling back to the NOTE: Broken, muddy or obstructed headlights and
neutral position returns the headlights to the low beam taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause
operation. headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).
Also, dirt, film and other obstructions on the windshield
Flash-To-Pass or camera lens will cause the system to function improp-
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by erly.
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This To Activate
will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and
remain on until the lever is released. 1. Select “Automatic High Beams — ON” through the
Uconnect system. Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in
2. Rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the 2. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the
AUTO (A) position. headlights from the high beam to the low beam
position.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to the high beam position. Refer to 3. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise from the AUTO
“Multifunction Lever” in this section for further infor- to the on position.
mation.
Battery Protection
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is This feature provides battery protection to avoid wearing
at, or above, 25 mph (40 km/h). down the battery if the headlights or parking lights are
To Deactivate left on for extended periods of time when the ignition
switch is in the LOCK position. After eight minutes of the
Perform either of the following steps to deactivate the
ignition switch being in the LOCK position and the
Automatic High Beam system.
headlight switch in any position other than OFF or
1. Select “Automatic High Beams — OFF” through the AUTO, the lights will turn off automatically until the next
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in cycle of the ignition switch or headlight switch.
The battery protection feature will be disabled if the
ignition switch is turned to any other position other than
LOCK during the eight minute delay.
INTERIOR LIGHTS To operate the courtesy lights, push either the driver’s or
passenger light switch.
Courtesy/Interior Lighting
The courtesy light switches are used to turn the courtesy NOTE:
lights On/Off. • Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the interior 3
lights are turned off. This will prevent the battery from
discharging once the doors are closed.
• If a light is left on, it will automatically be turned off
approximately 10 minutes after the ignition is in the
STOP/OFF position.
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If Equipped
Located above the rear passengers are courtesy/reading
lights. The lights turn on when a front door, a sliding
door or the liftgate is opened. If your vehicle is equipped
with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn
on when the UNLOCK button ON the RKE Key Fob is
Courtesy Light Switches
pushed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Push Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
the lens to turn these lights ON while inside the vehicle. The instrument panel dimmer control is part of the
Push the lens a second time to turn each light OFF. headlight switch and is located on the driver’s side of the
instrument panel.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the
instrument panel dimmer control upward will increase
the brightness of the instrument panel lights.
Reading Lights
Ambient Light Control — If Equipped
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or down-
ward to increase or decrease the brightness of the ambi-
ent light located in the overhead console, door handle
lights, under I/P lights, door map pocket lights, and 3
cubby bin lights.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer

Interior Lighting Off
Rotate the right (instrument panel) dimmer control to the
off position (extreme bottom). The interior lights will
remain off when the doors or liftgate are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, EVIC/DID, and radio when the
position lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS

Washer And Wiper Controls
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within
NOTE: Always remove any buildup of snow that pre-
the wiper lever. Rotate the end of the wiper lever to select
vents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
the desired wiper speed.
off position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off
and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage
to the wiper motor may occur.
The delay intervals will double in duration when the
WARNING!
vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
Windshield Wiper Operation
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past 3
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.
windshield with the defroster before and during Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
windshield washer use. past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper opera-
tion.
Intermittent Wiper System
Windshield Washers
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
To use the Washer, pull the lever rearward toward you
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be-
and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled
tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the wiper lever
while on the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on
to the first detent position, and then turn the end of the
and operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is
lever to select the desired delay interval. There are four
released, and then resume the intermittent interval pre-
delay settings, which allow you to regulate the wipe
viously selected. If the lever is pulled while the wipers
interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a
are in the off position, the wipers will operate several
maximum of approximately 36 seconds between cycles.
wipe cycles, then turn off.
Mist Feature With the windshield wipers on and reverse gear engaged,
rear window wiping will be continuous in the same way.
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever Rear Windshield Washer Operation
upward to the Mist position and release for a single Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward activates the
wiping cycle. rear window washer. Keep the windshield wiper lever
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer pushed for more than quarter a second to activate the
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the rear window wiper as well. Releasing the windshield
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to wiper lever will activate the smart washing function, as
spray the windshield with washer fluid. described for the windshield wipers.
Rear Wiper And Washer The function stops when the windshield wiper lever is
released.
Rear Windshield Wiper Operation
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
Rotate the windshield wiper lever center ring upwards to
operate the rear window wiper as follows: This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. This
• In intermittent mode when the front window wiper is feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
not operating. from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
• In continuous mode with reverse engaged.
the end of the multifunction lever to one of the four • Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
intermittent wiper sensitivity settings to activate this may reduce rain sensor performance.
feature.
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect
multifunction lever. Wiper sensitivity position 3 has been 3
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
calibrated for best overall wiping sensitivity. If the opera-
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
tor desires more wiping sensitivity, they may select
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
sensitivity positions 4. If the operator desires less wiping
following conditions:
sensitivity, they may select sensitivity positions 2 or 1.
Place the multifunction lever in the OFF position when • Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
not using the system. feature will not operate when the ignition is first
switched ON, and the vehicle is stationary, and the
NOTE:
outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, the
wiper speed is in the low or high position. vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph (0 km/h),
or the outside temperature rises above freezing.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice or dried saltwater is present on the wind-
shield.
• Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will CLIMATE CONTROLS
not operate when the ignition is ON, and the transmis-
Manual Climate Controls – 3 Zone — If Equipped
sion gear selector is in the NEUTRAL position, and the
vehicle speed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h), unless the
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, the
vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the
gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
• Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has
placed the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain
sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been
selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned
previously) exist.
Manual Temperature Controls (MTC) Touchscreen
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
3
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
Manual Temperature Controls (MTC) Faceplate
The Manual Climate Controls consist of a series of rotary 3. Recirculation Button
dials with inner push buttons. Press and release this button to change the system
between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recir-
culation can be used when outside conditions such as
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present.
NOTE: window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
Extended use of this mode is not recommended. and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
weather could cause windows to fog on the inside, system will return the previous setting.
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Se-
lect the outside air position for maximum defogging. 5. Rear Defrost Button
• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn
Defrost. ON the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when
• The A/C can be deselected manually without dis- the rear window defroster is ON. The rear window
turbing the mode control selection. defroster automatically turns OFF after 10 minutes.
4. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-
ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button
CAUTION!
on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s tem-
the heating elements: perature will move up with the driver’s temperature,
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear when it is increased. 3
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on 7. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the Provides the passenger with independent temperature
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler
soaking with warm water. temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button
window cleaners on the interior surface of the on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings. When
window. the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s temperature
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. will move up with the driver’s temperature, when it is
increased.
6. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
8. Blower Control
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer
forced through the climate system. There are seven
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The • Panel
speeds can be selected using either the blower control Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
as follows: ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower of airflow from these outlets.
control knob counterclockwise.
• Bi-Level
Button On The Touchscreen Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
directed through the defrost and side window
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
demister outlets.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons. NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-
9. Mode Control ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
Push this button to change the system between Modes
(Panel, Bi-Level, Floor, Mix, Defrost).
• Floor 11. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
small amount flowing through the defrost and
trol. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler tempera-
side window demister outlets.
ture settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the
• Mix temperature bar button towards the blue arrow for cooler
3
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and temperature settings. When the SYNC feature is active,
side window demister outlets. This setting the driver’s temperature will move down with the pas-
works best in cold or snowy conditions that senger’s temperature, when it is decreased.
require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is
good for maintaining comfort while reducing mois- 12. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
ture on the windshield. Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
10. Climate Control OFF Button trol. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer tem-
perature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control the temperature bar button towards the red arrow for
ON/OFF. warmer temperature settings. When the SYNC feature is
active, the driver’s temperature will move up with the
passenger’s temperature, when it is increased.
Rear Manual Temperature Control
The rear MTC system has floor air outlets at the rear right
side of the 3rd Row seats and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides
heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified
air through the headliner outlets.
The rear system temperature control buttons are located
on the headliner on the passenger side of the vehicle.
Rear Manual Climate Controls

1 — Mode Selection Button
2 — Temperature Control buttons
3 — Blower Control Buttons
4 — Rear Climate Control/Blower Off Button
Rear Mode Control Rear Temperature Control
Headliner Mode To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, push
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. temperature control up button to raise and down to
Each of these outlets can be individually ad- lower and clockwise to increase the temperature. The rear
justed to direct the flow of air. Moving the air temperature settings are displayed in control head. 3
vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the
airflow.
Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the control head is
Bi-Level Mode illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are ig-
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and nored.
the floor outlets.
Rear Blower Control
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head- The rear blower control can be manually set to off, or any
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. fixed blower speed by pushing the blower control but-
tons. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
Floor Mode
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
Air comes from the floor outlets.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in
floor under the passengers’ seats. Do not block or
place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or
heater outlets. The electrical system could overload
causing damage to the blower motor.
Rear Climate Control/Blower Off

To manually set the rear blower controls to off, press the
Rear Climate Control/Blower Off button.
Uconnect 5.0 Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) – 3 Zone — The Touchscreen
If Equipped
Buttons On The Faceplate
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
Uconnect screen.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect system screen.
3
Uconnect 8.4 Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On

The Touchscreen
Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons On The

Faceplate
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On The 3. Recirculation Button
Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen)
Press and release this button to change the system
1. MAX A/C Button between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recir-
Press and release to change the current setting, the culation can be used when outside conditions such as
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present.
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to 4. AUTO Operation Button
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
will turn off.
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
2. A/C Button this function will cause the system to switch between
Press and release to change the current setting, the manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this Operation” for more information.
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch 5. Front Defrost Button
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-
ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
CAUTION!
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
this function will cause the Automatic Temperature Con- Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
trol (ATC) to switch into manual mode. If the front the heating elements:
defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return • Use care when washing the inside of the rear 3
the previous setting. window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
6. Rear Defrost Button the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). soaking with warm water.
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically window cleaners on the interior surface of the
turns off after 10 minutes. window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
7. Rear Climate Control Button

Press and release this button to access the rear climate
controls. The indicator will illuminate when the rear
climate controls are ON.
8. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button 10. SYNC
Provides the passenger with independent temperaturePress the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the
control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer
Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated
when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize
slide the temperature bar button towards the red arrow
the passenger temperature setting with the driver tem-
for warmer temperature settings. perature setting. The Sync feature also synchronizes the
rear passengers’ temperature to the driver temperature
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting
automatically exit Sync.
while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
9. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler
slide the temperature bar button towards the blue arrow
for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
11. Blower Control 12. Modes
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air Push the button in the center of the knob to change the
forced through the climate system. There are seven airflow distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The 3
outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
speeds can be selected using either the blower control The Mode settings are as follows:
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen
as follows: • Panel Mode
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
control knob counterclockwise. direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the
Button On The Touchscreen air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
• Bi-Level Mode require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets good for maintaining comfort while reducing mois-
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is ture on the windshield.
directed through the defrost and side window demis- 13. Climate Control OFF Button
ter outlets.
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con- ON/OFF.
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets. 14. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
• Floor Mode Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight trol. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler tempera-
amount of air is directed through the defrost ture settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the
and side window demister outlets. temperature bar button towards the blue arrow for cooler
temperature settings.
• Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
side window demister outlets. This setting adjust the passenger, and rear temperature setting at the
works best in cold or snowy conditions that same time.
15. Driver Temperature Control Up Button Climate Control Functions
Provides the driver with independent temperature con- A/C (Air Conditioning)
trol. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer tem- The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
perature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning 3
the temperature bar button towards the red arrow for system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
warmer temperature settings. cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
time. adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
Driver and Passenger Temperature Control Button
NOTE:
Provides the temperature setting for both the driver and
the passenger seating positions, which can be indepen- • If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
dently set after selecting this button. select Defrost mode and increase blower speed if
needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo-
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from recirculate interior air by pressing the Recirculation con-
the front of the radiator and through the condenser. trol button. The recirculation indicator will illuminate
when this button is selected. Press the button a second
MAX A/C
time to turn off the Recirculation mode and allow outside
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor- air into the vehicle.
mance.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen
ON. greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation.
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode
selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
Recirculation mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
and then turn off.
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humid-
ity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) NOTE:
Automatic Operation • It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
1. Push the AUTO button on the front ATC Panel and the
mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as
word “AUTO” will illuminate in the front ATC dis- 3
possible.
play, along with two temperatures for the driver and
front passenger. The system will then automatically To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic
regulate the amount of airflow. mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The fan will engage
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the system to
immediately if the Defrost mode is selected, or by chang-
maintain, by adjusting the driver, passenger, and rear
ing the front blower knob setting.
temperatures. Once the desired temperature is dis-
played, the system will achieve and automatically Manual Operation Override
maintain that comfort level.
This system offers a full complement of manual override
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi- be turned off when the system is being used in the
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the manual mode.
system to function automatically.
NOTE: The system will not automatically sense the • To return to the Front screen on the Uconnect 8.4 radio,
presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. DEFROST press the ⬙Front Climate⬙ button on the touchscreen. To
mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield return to the Front screen on the Uconnect 5.0 radio,
and side glass. press the “Done” button on the touchscreen.
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The
Front ATC Panel
The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of the
rear climate controls from the front ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
• Press the ⬙REAR CLIMATE⬙ button on the touchscreen
to change control to rear control mode, Rear display
(below) will appear. Control functions now operate
rear system.
Uconnect 5.0 Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display

3. Blower Control Display
This display shows the current Blower speed selection.
4. Rear Auto Indicator
This indicates when the system is in Rear Auto mode. 3
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If

Equipped
The rear ATC system has floor air outlets underneath the
passengers’ seats, and overhead outlets at each outboard
rear seating position. The system provides heated air
through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified air
Uconnect 8.4 Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display
through the headliner outlets.
1. Mode Display
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC
This display shows the current Mode selection. control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned
2. Rear Temperature Display off.
This display shows the temperature setting for the rear The rear ATC system is located in the headliner, on the
seat occupants. passenger side of the vehicle.
1. Adjust the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the
Rear Modes to suit your comfort needs.
2. ATC is selected by pushing the AUTO button.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC
System will automatically achieve and maintain that
comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE:
Rear Automatic Climate Controls • It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
1 — Mode Control The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
2 — Temperature Control mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as
3 — Blower Control possible.
4 — Auto Button
5 — Rear Climate Control/Blower Off Button
Rear Blower Control When rear controls are locked by the front system, the
The rear blower control head can be manually set to off, Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the ATC panel is
or any fixed blower speed, by pushing the blower control illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are ig-
buttons. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the nored.
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle. 3
When the Sync feature is active, the rear temperature is
synchronized to the driver’s temperature setting. If the
CAUTION! rear temperature is changed, the Sync feature will deac-
tivate.
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in Rear Mode Control
floor under the passengers’ seats. Do not block or Auto Mode
place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or
heater outlets. The electrical system could overload The rear system automatically maintains the correct
causing damage to the blower motor. mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat occu-
pants.
Rear Temperature Control
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, push
the temperature buttons. The rear temperature settings
are displayed in the rear ATC panel.
Headliner Mode Operating Tips
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to suggested control settings for various weather condi-
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets tions.
to one side will shut off the airflow.
Summer Operation
Bi-Level Mode
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-
floor outlets. sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
Refer to “Fluids Aand Lubricants” in “Technical Data”
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head-
for proper coolant selection.
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Winter Operation
Floor Mode
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
Air comes from the floor outlets.
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is function-
ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concen-
tration of coolant is used. Refer to “Fluids Aand
Lubricants” in “Technical Data” for proper coolant selec- Outside Air Intake
tion. Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
months is not recommended, because it may cause windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
window fogging. collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In 3
Vacation/Storage
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
slush, and snow.
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes, in A/C Air Filter
fresh air with the blower setting on high. This will ensure The climate control system filters out dust and pollen
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility from the air. Contact your authorized dealer to service
of compressor damage when the system is started again. your A/C air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed.
Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Operating Tips Chart
WINDOWS
Power Windows
Driver Power Window Controls
You can control either the front or rear windows using 3
controls located on the driver’s door trim panel.
The driver may lock out the rear power windows by
pushing the bar control just below the power window
controls.
The controls will operate only when the ignition switch is
in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power
accessory delay. Driver’s Power Window Controls
1 — Front Driver And Passenger Window Controls
2 — Rear Passenger Window Controls
3 — Power Window Lockout Switch — If Equipped
NOTE: Power Window controls will also remain active Front Passenger Power Door Controls
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been
turned to OFF, depending upon the accessory delay
setting. Opening a front door will cancel this feature.
There is a single control on the front passenger’s door
trim panel which operates the passenger door window
and a set of controls that lock and unlock all doors. The
controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power acces-
sory delay.
Front Passenger Power Door Controls

1 — Window Open/Close
2 — Power Door Locks
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — If • Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
Equipped the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
The front driver and front passenger controls may be closure. If this happens, pull the control lightly to the
first detent and hold to close window manually.
equipped with an Auto Up feature. Lift the window
control fully upward to the second detent, release, and NOTE: There is no anti-pinch protection when the win- 3
the window will go up automatically. dow is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to
To stop the window from going all the way up during the clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the
Auto Up operation, push down on the control briefly. window path before closing.
To close the window part way, lift the window control to Auto Up Reset — If Equipped
the first detent and release when you want the window to To reactivate the Auto Up feature, perform the following
stop. steps after vehicle power is restored:
NOTE: 1. Pull the window control up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the control up for an
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
control again to close the window.
2. Push the window control down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the control down for an additional two sec-
onds after the window is fully open.
Sliding Side Door Power Window Control — If
Equipped
Second row passengers may open and close the sliding
door window by a single control on the door handle
assembly.
The controls will operate only when the ignition switch is
in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power
Sliding Door Power Window Control
accessory delay.
NOTE: The sliding door windows do not fully open,
NOTE: The controls will not operate if the driver has stopping several inches above the window sill.
activated the Power Window Lockout.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the rear windows are
open and buffeting occurs, open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the 3
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
roof opening to minimize the buffeting.
TRI-PANE VISTA VIEW SUNROOF — IF

EQUIPPED
The Tri-Pane Vista View Sunroof switch is located to the
left between the sun visors on the overhead console.
Tri-Pane Vista View Sunroof And Power Shade Switches
The Power Shade switch is located to the right between
1 — Sunroof Switch
the sun visors on the overhead console. 2 — Power Shade Switch

• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or • Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location object, to project through the sunroof opening.
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of Injury may result.
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the Opening Sunroof
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the Express Mode
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof Push the switch rearward and release it within one
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automati-
injury or death. cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could Open.” During Express Open operation, any other actua-
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten tion of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are also properly secured. NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically
(Continued) cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof
opening to the Vent position.
Manual Mode Closing Sunroof
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward Express Mode
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the Push the switch forward and release it within one second
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a and the sunroof will close automatically from any posi-
partially opened condition until the sunroof switch is 3
tion. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically.
pushed again. This is called “Express Close.” During Express Close
Venting Sunroof — Express operation, any other actuation of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
Push and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button within one second and
the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called Manual Mode
“Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of sunroof To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
position. forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically closed condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof Wind Buffeting
opening to the Vent position.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- To open the shade, push and hold the switch rearward.
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with The shade will open and stop automatically at the
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows half-open position. Push and hold the shade switch
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs rearward again and the shade will open automatically to
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to the full-open position. Any release of the switch will stop
minimize the buffeting or open any window. the movement and the shade will remain in a partially
Power Sun Shade — If Equipped opened condition until the switch is pushed again.
Opening Power Shade — Express Mode Closing Power Shade — Express Mode
Push the shade switch rearward and release it within one Push the switch forward and release it within one second
second and the shade will open automatically from any and the shade will close automatically from any position.
position. The shade will open and stop automatically at If the sunroof is completely closed the shade will close
the half-open position. Push the shade switch rearward fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
again and release it within one second and the shade will Close”. During Express Close operation, any other actua-
open automatically to the full-open position. This is tion of the switch will stop the shade.
called “Express Open”. During Express Open operation,
any other actuation of the shade switch will stop the
shade.
NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
half-open position. Pushing the shade close button again in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and
will automatically close both the sunroof and shade the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
completely.
Sunroof Maintenance
Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode 3
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
To close the shade, push and hold the switch in the the glass panel.
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
Ignition OFF Operation
movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed
condition until the switch is pushed again. The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
Pinch Protect Feature
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of will cancel this feature.
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc- Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mu-
tion if this occurs. litmedia” for further information.
HOOD
Opening
The hood release lever (to open the primary latch) and
safety latch (to open the secondary latch) must be re-
leased to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the driver’s
side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever

2. Move to the outside of the front of the vehicle.
3. Push the safety latch release lever toward the passen-
ger side of the vehicle. The safety latch is located
behind the center front edge of the hood.
NOTE:
• Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms are
not in motion and not in the lifted position.
• While lifting the hood, use both hands. 3
• Vehicle must be at a stop and the automatic transmis-
sion must be in park. Manual transmission vehicles
must have the electric park brake engaged.
Closing
1. Hold up the hood with one hand and with the other
Safety Latch Location hand remove the support rod from its seat and reinsert
it into the locking tab.
4. Remove the support rod from the locking tab and
insert it into the seat located on the underside of the 2. Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
hood. from the engine compartment and drop it. Make sure
that the hood is completely closed.
LIFTGATE
CAUTION!
Opening
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 in (30 cm) To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully The liftgate may be released in several ways:
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged. • Overhead console liftgate button
• RKE Key Fob
WARNING! • Outside handle
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your Push the liftgate button on the RKE transmitter twice
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open within five seconds to release the liftgate.
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, pulling the out-
side handle will unlock and release the liftgate, with a
valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 3 ft (1 m) of the
liftgate.
3
Unlock Liftgate Using An RKE Key Fob

The RKE Key Fob and the overhead console button will
release the liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The
outside handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked. If the
Unlock Liftgate Using Passive Entry
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”’ is programmed
in Uconnect Settings, all doors will unlock with a Passive
Entry handle activation. If ‘Unlock Driver Door 1st Press”
is programmed in Uconnect Settings, only the liftgate
will unlock. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
Closing
To Close The Vehicle
Grasp the liftgate closing handle and initiate lowering the
liftgate. Release the handle when the liftgate takes over
the closing effort.
Rear Power Liftgate Switch
The liftgate can also be closed using the Rear Power To Lock The Vehicle
Liftgate button (If Equipped), located in the upper left
trim in the liftgate opening. Pushing button will only With a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 3 ft (1 m)
close the liftgate. This button cannot be used to open the of the liftgate, pushing the passive entry lock button
liftgate. located to the right of the outside handle will lock the
vehicle.
• RKE Key Fob
WARNING!
• Outside handle (opens liftgate only)
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your • Button just inside the liftgate on the upper left trim
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep (when liftgate is open) 3
the liftgate closed when you are operating the • Hands-Free Liftgate – If Equipped
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, Using the above ways:
make sure that all windows are closed, and the • when the liftgate is fully closed, the liftgate will open
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode. • when the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate will close
• when the liftgate is moving, the liftgate will reverse
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
Push the Power Liftgate button on the Overhead Console
The power liftgate may be opened or closed in several
to open or close the liftgate.
ways:
• Overhead console liftgate button
outside handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked. If the
vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, pulling the out-
side handle or Hands-Free Liftgate foot activation (if
equipped) will unlock and open the liftgate, with a valid
Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 3 ft (1 m) of the
liftgate handle.
NOTE: To open or close the liftgate, the Hands-Free
Liftgate foot activation (if equipped) requires a valid
Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 3 ft (1 m) of the door
handle.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
Overhead Console Power Liftgate Power Switch in Uconnect Settings, all doors will unlock with a Passive
1 — Liftgate Entry handle activation. If “Unlock Driver Door 1st
2 — Right Sliding Door Press” is programmed in Uconnect Settings, only the
3 — Side Door Lock Switch liftgate will unlock. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
4 — Left Sliding Door “Multimedia” for further information.
The RKE Key Fob and the overhead console button will
operate the liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The
NOTE: Tones are sounded and the turn signals are Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped
flashed with liftgate movements. These alerts can be
turned on or off in Uconnect Settings. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Lock The Vehicle 3
With a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 3 ft (1 m)

of the liftgate, pushing the passive entry lock button
located to the right of the outside handle will lock the
vehicle.
Hands-Free Liftgate Activation Zone

To open or close the liftgate using hands-free activation,
use a gentle straight forward and back kicking motion
under the vehicle activation zone in the general location
below the liftgate door handle. Do not move your foot The Hands-Free Liftgate feature may be turned on or
sideways or in a sweeping motion or the sensors may not off in Uconnect Settings. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
detect the motion. in “Multimedia” for further information. The Hands-
Free Liftgate feature should be turned off during Jack-
Vehicles Equipped With A Trailer Tow Package
ing, Tire Changing, and Service.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Trailer Tow Pack-
NOTE:
age, the hands-free activation zone(s) for the Power
Liftgate will be located on the left and right side of the • The liftgate will not power open or close if the gear
receiver. Use the same gentile straight kicking motion selector is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 MPH
under either activation zone to open/close the Hands- (0 km/h).
Free Liftgate.
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
NOTE: To open or close the Hands-Free Liftgate requires closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 3 ft (1 m) of the reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
door handle. If a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob is not meets sufficient resistance.
within 3 ft (1 m), the liftgate will not respond to any
• There are pinch sensors attached to the side of the
kicks.
liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along these
strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open
position.
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop. If this occurs, the liftgate must be opened or the liftgate closed when you are operating the
closed manually. vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, 3
• The power liftgate will release, but not power open or make sure that all windows are closed, and the
close, in temperatures below −12° F (−24° C). Be sure to climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate Do not use the recirculation mode.
before opening the liftgate.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
• If the liftgate is left open for an extended period of
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
time, the liftgate may need to be closed manually to
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
reset power liftgate functionality.
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
WARNING! NOTE: Allow the power system to open the liftgate.
Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous liftgate obstacle detection feature and stop the power
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your operation or reverse its direction.
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
(Continued)
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
Cargo Area Features

Cargo Area Storage
When the third row seats are not in the stowed position,
there is a large area for cargo storage.
Rear Cargo Area
NOTE: With all rear seats stowed or removed, 4 x 8 foot
sheets of building material will fit on the vehicle floor
with the liftgate closed. The front seats must be moved
slightly forward of the rearmost position.
Stow n’ VAC Integrated Vacuum — If Equipped
WARNING!
Your vehicle may be equipped with an integrated
vacuum system. The system can clean up dry spills and Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
debris within the vehicle. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning: 3
1. Make sure the vehicle is in Park (P) and the ignition is • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
set to Run/Accessory mode. monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
NOTE: kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
• The vacuum system will run for 10 minutes off engine running for an extended period. If the
battery power. At 10 minutes, the vacuum will shut vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
down and a low battery indication light will come on running for more than a short period, adjust the
one minute before shutdown. ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
• When the vehicle engine is running, the vacuum will the vehicle.
be capable of continuous operation. • Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
2. Open front vacuum storage compartments to access
the attachments if needed.
Power Buttons
1 — Low Power Indicator Light
Front Storage Compartments 2 — On/Off Button
1 — Retractable Vacuum Head/Hose Location
2 — Attachment Compartment Location 3. Pull out the vacuum hose and push the power button
located under the vacuum head. Begin to vacuum
(Dry use only).
Vacuum Attachments
• Crevice Tool — Able to reach into tight spots including
the latches located in the floor for the seats.
• Upholstery Tool — Use to agitate dirt and debris from 3
carpets and seats. This tool can also be used to pick up
pet hair as well.
• Hose Extension — Use to add another 48 inches to the
end of the hose.
Vacuum System Access Panels

1 — Upper Access Panel
2 — Lower Access Panel
To Remove And Empty The Debris Bin
To access and remove the debris bin, open the lower
access panel by pulling outward on the finger grip area of
the door. For debris bin removal, twist the (color) release
knob counterclockwise and pull the bin towards you.
Remove the filter and dump the debris in the proper
collection bin. Lightly tap the filter on the collection bin
to remove any collected debris from the filter pleats.
Reverse the procedure to reinstall.
NOTE: The filter must be properly installed in the debris
bin before installing the debris bin in the vehicle.
Debris Bin Release Knob
Vacuum Troubleshooting
• If an object(s) become lodged in the hose, first try fully
extending the hose in a straight line while the vacuum
motor is on. If this does not work, then remove the
hose and try to shake it out.
• If the filter is clogged, follow the emptying debris bin Flammable / Explosive Liquids And Vapors
procedure and lightly tap the filter on the collection
Do not vacuum any flammable liquid
bin to remove any collected debris from the filter
spills or around explosive vapors.
pleats.
3
• If filter is in need of replacement, please see your
authorized dealer for a replacement filter.
Precautions While Using Vacuum System
Dry Vac Only
The Vacuum System is meant for dry
vacuuming only. Do Not use to pick
up spilled fluids, which can damage
the Vacuum System.
Carbon Monoxide Gas
WARNING!
Do not leave the vehicle’s liftgate open
Flammable liquids and vapors can be ignited by
if the vehicle is running while the
heat, sparks, or flames. Vapors from flammable liq-
vacuum is in use.
uids may form an explosive mixture with the air.
Vapors may travel to source of ignition and cause an
explosion. Any disregard of this warning could result
in injury or death.
WARNING!
WARNING! Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Do not leave the vacuum running while unattended. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
Do not use with a missing or damage filter, as it will monoxide poisoning:
allow debris to pass through the motor and possibly • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
damage it. Frequently check the filter to insure it is in monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
place and in good condition. kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
engine running for an extended period. If the
(Continued)
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
running for more than a short period, adjust the that operate devices such as garage door openers, motor-
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into ized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt 3
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main- battery.
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every The HomeLink buttons, located on the driver’s sunvisor,
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal designate the three different HomeLink channels. The
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive HomeLink indicator is located above the center button.
WARNING!
Do not pick up anything that is burning or smoking,
such as cigarettes, matches, or hot ashes. Vehicle
damage, personal injury, or death may result from
vacuuming up burning or smoking material.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink
system.
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds or until the orange
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
HomeLink Buttons
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
Alarm is active.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
before you begin programming.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manu-
factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door 3
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener

1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
program while you push and hold the hand-held
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
transmitter button.
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
cator light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly activates, programming is complete.
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti-
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
complete the training.
from slow to rapid.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can channels.
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN-
ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Rolling 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
Code) cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
in view.
follow these steps:
3. Push and hold the Homelink button you want to 3
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
program while you push and hold the hand-held
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the transmitter button.
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
release the button.
cator light. The Homelink indicator will flash slowly
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
steps.⬙ lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
before 1995. and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons, Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
erase the channels. that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Non- several seconds of transmission.
Rolling Code) Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
follow these steps: mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the time-out in the same manner.
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
release the button. process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- door or gate motor.
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
remaining steps.⬙
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches NOTE:
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish • If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator ming is complete and the garage door/device should
light in view. activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
3
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button, • To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
while you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has erase the channels.
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
fully trained. programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
door may open and close while you are programming. follow these steps:
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
and observe the indicator light.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not seconds until the orange indicator flashes. Note that all
release the button. channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when
follow all remaining steps. the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Using HomeLink Troubleshooting Tips
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed are some of the most common solutions:
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security • Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener hand-
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The held transmitter.
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time. • Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
Security
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn remember to plug it back in?
in your vehicle.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance. after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
WARNING! or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety 3
information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage General Information
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
can cause serious injury or death. Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close two conditions:
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, 1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or 2. This device must accept any interference that may be
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door received including interference that may cause unde-
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as sired operation.
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
(Continued)
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-
fications were met.
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Release Handle
Storage
Front Door Storage
Glove Compartment
Both interior front door panels have multiple pockets for
To open the glove compartment pull out on the release storage.
handle.
Instrument Panel Drawer
There is a storage drawer located in the lower center of
the instrument panel. It can be released by pushing the
access button above it. The drawer is actuator assisted
once the access button is pushed. Pull drawer outward to 3
the fully open position.
Front Door Storage
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burn-
ing the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors
to avoid injury. Drawer Access Button
Drawer Released Drawer Fully Open
CAUTION!
The storage drawer must be closed while driving. If
left open during a collision, additional damage may
occur to property or the drawer mechanism.
Front Seatback Storage — If Equipped Umbrella Holder
The front seatbacks have a storage pocket on some An umbrella holder has been conveniently molded into
models. the front door entry scuff moldings.
3
Front Seatback Storage Umbrella Holder

Second Row Floor Storage Bins 1. To access the storage bin with front seats in the
The area below the load floor, located in front of the rearward position, place the lock rod in the unlocked
second row seats, is available for storage. position so the load floor can fold upwards towards
the seatback.
In Floor Storage Location

Lock Rod
NOTE:
• Push the lock rod inward for the locked position.
• Pull outward on the lock rod for the unlocked
position. 3
the floor panel.
Floor Latch
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lay flat and be locked to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover. If the
(Continued)
Storage Bin Safety Warning
storage bin cover is left in the open position, front Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal
seat adjustment may damage the cover. injury or damage to your vehicle:
WARNING!
WARNING!
• Always close the storage bin covers when your
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
vehicle is unattended.
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• Do not allow children to have access to the second
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers row seat storage bins. Once in the storage bin,
open. young children may not be able to escape. If
• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched trapped in the storage bin, children can die from
while the vehicle is in motion. suffocation or heat stroke.
• Do not operate the storage bin covers while the • In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
vehicle is in motion. storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down. • Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open. Keep the storage bin covers closed and
latched while the vehicle is in motion.
(Continued)
• Do not operate the storage bin covers while the
vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down. 3
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lay flat and be locked to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover. If the
storage bin cover is left in the open position, front
seat adjustment may damage the cover. Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside
Seat Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from
As a security measure, the Seat Storage Bin Cover has an inside of the bin by pushing on the glow-in-the-dark
Emergency Release Lever built into the latching mecha- lever attached to the storage bin cover latching mecha-
nism. nism.
Coat Hooks Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
Coat hooks are located along the headliner for the second An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor.
and third row seating positions. The coat hook load limit To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing
is 10 lbs (4.5 kg). Exceeding the recommended load limit the mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automati-
can cause the coat hooks to break or disengage from the cally. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
vehicle.
Illuminated Mirror
Coat Hook
Sun Screens — If Equipped Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen.
Sun screens are available for second and third row Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is near the
seating windows. The screens store in the sill trim panels, top of the window.
and the tops of the windows are equipped with hooks Once the screen is completely to the top of the window,
that the sun screens attach to when pulled out. extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooks 3
attached to the top of the window.
Sun Screen Retracted

Sun Screen Extended
To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upward to NOTE:
disengage the hooks, and feed the screen back into the
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
base sill.
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
Power Outlets vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power discharge.
outlets, and 5 Volt (2.5 Amp) USB power outlets, that can • To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a MOPAR
be used to power cellular phones, small electronics and knob and element must be used.
other low powered electrical accessories. The power
outlets can be labeled with either a “key” or a “battery” CAUTION!
symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered. Power
outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when the Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
ignition is in the ON or ACC position, while the outlets Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to the this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
battery and powered at all times. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The front power outlet is located at the bottom of the
instrument panel.
Front USB Charge Only Port

In addition to the front power outlets, there is also a
12 Volt Front Power Outlet power outlet located in the rear cargo area.
The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo
area.
Rear Power Outlet Power Outlet Fuse Locations

NOTE: The USB outlet in the bottom of the instrument 1 — F95A-F95B USB IP 10A
panel can be switched from “ignition” only to constant 2 — F85 Cigar Lighter 20A
“battery” powered all the time. See your local authorized 3 — F60 RR Cargo Power Outlet 20A
dealer for details.
WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued)

To avoid serious injury or death: discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, 3
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat-
• Do not touch with wet hands.
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle. tently and with greater caution.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric • After the use of high power draw accessories, or
shock and failure. long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
CAUTION! generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
Power Inverter — If Equipped
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt Power Inverter outlet located
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will on the right side of the vehicle, before the third row of
seats to convert DC current to AC current. The Power
(Continued) Inverter can power cellular phones, electronics and other
low power devices requiring up to 150 Watts. Certain The Power Inverter is designed with built-in overload
high-end video game consoles will exceed this power protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
limit, as will most power tools. the Power Inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the Power
Inverter it will automatically reset. To avoid overloading
the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices
prior to using the Power Inverter.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
115 Volt Power Inverter shock and failure.
The Power Inverter will automatically turn on and off
when the device is plugged in or removed.
Cigar Lighter — If Equipped
CAUTION!
NOTE: Cigar lighters can be purchased at an authorized
Do not connect devices with power higher than 180
dealer through MOPAR parts. To ensure proper cigar
Watts (15 Amps) to the socket. Do not damage the
lighter operation, a MOPAR knob and element must be
socket by using unsuitable adaptors. If the 180 Watt 3
used.
(15 Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse protect-
The cigar lighter is located at the bottom of the instru- ing the system will need to be replaced.
ment panel. Push lighter inward to heat.
Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped
After a few seconds, the lighter automatically returns to
its initial position and is ready to be used. With the optional authorized dealer-installed Smoker’s
Package Kit, a removable ash receiver is inserted into one
WARNING! of the two cupholders in the center floor console. To
install the ash receiver, align the receiver so the thumb
When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot. grip on the lid is facing rearward. Push the ash receiver
To avoid serious injury, handle the cigar lighter with into either of the cup wells to secure. Pull upward on the
care. Always check that the cigar lighter has turned ash receiver to remove for cleaning and/or storage.
off.
The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to accom-
modate a second ash receiver, if desired.
Overhead Storage With Sunglass Storage The door will slowly rotate to the full open position.
At the front of the overhead console, a compartment is
provided for the storage of one pair of sunglasses.
From the closed position, push the door latch to open the
compartment.
Full Open Position
Over Head Sunglass Door Latch

ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight
on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must
not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly
distributed over the luggage rack crossbars. 3
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed

within the roof rack side rails. Crossbars should always
be used whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check
the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains
securely attached.
Roof Rack
1 — Side Rail
2 — Crossbar
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
Deploying The Crossbars
To deploy the crossbars, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends of the crossbar and lift the crossbar
from its stowed position in the side rail. Repeat with
crossbar on the opposite side.
Thumb Screw
NOTE: The thumb screws cannot be fully removed.
Bend the crossbar supports at each end, taking care to
keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Slide the thumb screw
down.
Removing Crossbars
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the crossbars Bending Pivot
to prevent damage to the vehicle. Position the crossbars across the roof making sure the
letters on the crossbars align with the matching letters on
the side rail.
Positioning Crossbars Installing Crossbars

Once the crossbar is in place, tighten both thumb screws Deploy and tighten the second crossbar to complete the
completely. deployment of the crossbars.
NOTE: The crossbars are not identical and have fixed
deployment positions. Rear crossbar can deployed in two
different positions.
Stowing The Crossbars
Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends. Lift the crossbar away from the
matching letter to remove it from the deployed position.
Repeat with the other crossbar. 3
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the crossbars
to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Starting with the one crossbar, bend up the pivot sup-

ports at each end. Crossbar Pivot
Then, position the crossbar along the correct side rail. The crossbar will nest fully within the side rail.
Make sure the letters on the crossbar align with the
matching letters on the side rail.
Crossbar To Side Rail
Stowing Crossbars
Once the driver’s side crossbar is in place, tighten the Repeat the procedure to stow the second crossbar on the
thumb screws completely. opposite side.
Tightening Crossbar Stowed Crossbars

NOTE:
• To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the • To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
side rails when they are not in use. not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
• If any metallic object is placed over the satellite radio 150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
antenna (if equipped), you may experience interrup- evenly as possible and secure the load appropri-
tion of satellite radio reception. ately.
• Load should always be secured to cross bars first,
CAUTION! with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supple-
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO mentary tie down points only. Do not use ratchet-
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the ing mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the
crossbars deployed. The load should be secured straps and thumb wheels frequently to be sure that
and placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the load remains securely attached.
the roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the • Long loads that extend over the windshield, such
roof, place a blanket or other protective layer as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
between the load and the roof surface. frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby 3
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving
your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 䡵 TRIP COMPUTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
4
▫ Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . .214 䡵 WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND MESSAGES . .230
䡵 DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 ▫ Red Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Location and ▫ Yellow Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
▫ Green Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ Oil Change Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
▫ Blue Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
▫ KeySense Cluster Messages — If Equipped . . .218
▫ White Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
▫ EVIC/DID Display Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . .219
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .261
▫ Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
212 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
3.5” EVIC Instrument Cluster

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
7” DID Instrument Cluster

Instrument Cluster Descriptions • The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
For 3.5” EVIC Cluster and 7” DID Cluster vehicle where the fuel door is located.
5. Temperature Gauge
1. Tachometer
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
(RPM x 1000).
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
2. 3.5” EVIC / 7” DID Information Display satisfactorily.
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display • The gauge can indicate a higher temperature when
shows the 3.5” EVIC OR 7” DID messages. Refer to driving in hot weather or up mountain grades. It
“Display” located in “Getting To Know Your Instru- should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of
ment Panel” for further information. the normal operating range.
3. Speedometer WARNING!
• Indicates vehicle speed.
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
4. Fuel Gauge damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
• The gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank reaches “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position. vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the
(Continued)
DISPLAY
gauge drops back into the normal range and is no The vehicle can be equipped with a Electronic Vehicle
longer red. If the gauge remains on the “H”, turn the Information Center (EVIC), or a Driver Information Dis-
engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer play (DID), which offers useful information to the driver.
for service. With the ignition in the STOP/OFF position, opening/
closing of a door will activate the display for viewing, 4
and display the total miles or kilometers in the odometer.
WARNING!
Instrument Cluster Display Location and Controls
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling The 3.5” EVIC and 7” DID feature a driver-interactive
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer display that is located in the center of the instrument
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to cluster.
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining And The EVIC/DID Main Menu items consists of the follow-
Caring For Your Vehicle”. ing:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Driver Assist — 7” DID
• Fuel Economy Info
• Trip (Trip A/Trip B)
• Audio
• Navigation
• Messages
• Screen Setup
• Speed Warning — 7” DID
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Instrument Cluster Display (EVIC/DID) Control Buttons
wheel:
• UP Arrow Button
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
upward through the Main Menu items.
• DOWN Arrow Button and hold the OK arrow button for one second to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the Main Menu Oil Change Reset
items.
• Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
• RIGHT Arrow Button indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
flash in the instrument cluster display for approxi- 4
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
mately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded, to
access the information screens or submenu
indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The
screens of a main menu item.
engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based,
• BACK/LEFT Arrow Button which means the engine oil change interval may
fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style.
Push and release the LEFT arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu • Unless reset, this message will continue to display
screens of a main menu item. each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
position. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
• OK Button performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the
Push the OK button to access/select the information following procedure.
screens or submenu screens of a Main Menu item. Push
• To reset the oil change indicator after performing the 1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
scheduled maintenance, refer to the following proce- START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
dure. ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine.)
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition 2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Cycle the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
KeySense Cluster Messages — If Equipped
When the KeySense key is in use there will be:
• Continuous, dedicated telltale

Push Button Ignition
• Unique Display Splash Screen
With KeySense in use there will be multiple associated Setting Cluster Display Message
messages shown in the following table:
Blind Spot “Feature cannot be disabled. Key-
Setting Cluster Display Message Sense in use”
None – With “KeySense in use. Max vehicle speed Forward Col- “Feature cannot be disabled. Key-
vehicle igni- set to xx MPH/or km/h” lision Warn- Sense in use”
tion ON ing 4
Max Vehicle • “Max speed reached. KeySense in EVIC/DID Display Menu Items
Speed use” supported by a chime
NOTE: The EVIC/DID menu items display in the center
• “Approaching max speed xx
of the instrument cluster. Menu items may vary depend-
MPH/km” supported by a chime
ing on your vehicle features.
Start Up Fuel “Range to empty xxx miles or km”
Alert message Speedometer
Early Low “Fuel Low” Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button
Fuel Alert until the Speedometer Menu displays in the EVIC/
Message DID. Push and release the OK button to toggle be-
ParkSense “Feature cannot be disabled. Key- tween MPH and km/h.
Sense in use”
Vehicle Info Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button
until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted in the EVIC/ Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
DID. Push the LEFT or RIGHT arrow button to under “Safety” for further information.
scroll through the following information submenus: • Coolant Temperature
Tire Pressure Displays the actual coolant temperature.
If tire pressure is OK for all tires, a vehicle ICON is • Transmission Temperature – Automatic Transmission
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the Only
ICON.
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To
XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON, and the tire • Oil Temperature
pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the Displays the actual oil temperature.
pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different
• Oil Pressure
color than the other tire pressure value.
Displays the actual oil pressure.
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire
Pressure System” is displayed.
Oil Life (Hold OK Button To Reset) Driver Assist (7” DID)
The “Hold OK to Reset” instruction will be displayed at Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button
all times, but the following conditions will need to be met until the Driver Assist display icon is highlighted in
in order to reset Oil Life: the DID cluster display. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
The vehicle’s engine must be off Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information. 4
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position
Fuel Economy
• If the conditions are met, holding the OK button will
reset the gauge and the numeric display will return to Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button
100%. until the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted in
the EVIC/DID. The Fuel Economy Menu will display
• If the conditions are not met, a popup message will
the following:
display for 5 seconds, describing the required condi-
tions, and then the Oil Life screen will reappear. • Two sub menu pages that can be toggled between
• Battery Voltage using the LEFT and RIGHT arrow buttons;
one with Current value displayed and one without
Displays the actual battery voltage.
the Current Value displayed (for DID only):
– Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
– Range To Empty (miles or km)
– Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l) Audio
– The Max and Min values will correspond to the Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button
particular engine requirements until the Audio Menu displays in the EVIC/DID.
• Hold OK to reset average fuel economy information. Navigation
Trip Info When this feature is selected, the navigation system
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button utilizes voice commands, guiding through the drive
until the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC/ route, mile by mile, turn-by-turn until the final destina-
DID. Push the LEFT or RIGHT arrow button to tion is reached.
scroll through the Trip A and Trip B submenus. The Stored Messages
Trip information will display the following:
• Distance until the Messages Menu displays in the EVIC/DID.
This feature shows the number of stored warning
• Average Fuel Economy
messages. Pushing the RIGHT arrow button will
• Elapsed Time allow you to see what the stored messages are.
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Screen Setup 1. Upper Left
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button • None
until the Screen Setup Menu displays in the EVIC/ • Compass (Default)
DID. Push and release the OK button to enter the • Outside Temp.
submenus. The Screen Setup feature allows you to • Time
change what information is displayed in the instru- • Range 4
ment cluster as well as the location that information is
• Average MPG (L/100km, or km/L)
displayed.
• Current MPG (L/100km, or km/L)
EVIC Screen Setup Options:
2. Center
Upper Right
• None
• None
• Compass
• Compass
• Outside Temp.
• Outside Temp. (Default)
• Time
• Time
• Range
• Range
• Current MPG (L/100km, or km/L)
• Current MPG (or L/100km, or km/L)
• Trip A Distance • Time
• Trip B Distance • Range
• Audio • Average MPG (L/100km, or km/L)
• Menu Title (Default) • Current MPG (L/100km, or km/L)
• Digital Speed • Trip A Distance
3. Current Gear • Trip B Distance
• On 2. Center
• Off (Default) • None
4. Defaults • Compass
• Restore • Outside Temp.
• Cancel • Time
• Range
DID Screen Setup Options:
1. Lower Left • Current MPG (L/100km, or km/L)
• None • Trip A Distance
• Compass (Default) • Trip B Distance
• Outside Temp.
• Audio 5. Odometer
• Digital Speed • Show
• Menu Title (Default) • Hide (Odometer will still appear when door is open)
3. Lower Right 6. Defaults
• None • Restore
4
• Compass • Cancel
• Outside Temp. (Default) Speed Warning — If Equipped (7” DID)
• Time
• Range until the Speed Warning Menu title is highlighted in
• Average MPG (L/100km, or km/L) the DID. Push and release the OK button to enter
• Current MPG (L/100km, or km/L) speed warning. Use the UP or DOWN arrow
• Trip A Distance button to turn the speed warning ON or OFF, then
• Trip B Distance push and release the OK button to confirm the selec-
tion. If the ON status is selected, use the UP or
4. Current Gear DOWN arrow button to set the desired speed, then
• On press the OK button to set the speed for the speed
• Off (Default) warning. A speed warning telltale will illuminate in
the instrument cluster, with a number matching the set load reduction actions will take place to extend the
speed, with a pop up message to inform the driver driving time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by
that the speed warning has been set to the desired reducing power to or turning off non-essential electrical
speed. Each time the set speed is exceeded, an audible loads.
chime will sound for up to 10 seconds, or until the Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
speed is no longer exceeded. The telltale in the instru- It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
ment cluster will also change from white to yellow, depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
and a pop up warning message will pop up on the 7” lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the
DID screen. current drive cycle.
NOTE: Speed Warning is unavailable while KeySense is When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
in use. Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message — Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped Information Display (DID).
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low
Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a
electrical system and status of the vehicle battery. rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
NOTE: • HVAC System
• The charging system is independent from load reduc- • 115V AC Power Inverter System
tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
• Audio and Telematics System
charging system continuously.
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of
• If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may
the following conditions: 4
indicate a problem with the charging system. Refer to
“Battery Charge Warning Light” in ”Warning/ • The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
Indicator Lights And Messages” located in ”Under- power to the vehicle system because the electrical
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further informa- loads are larger than the capability of charging system.
tion. The charging system is still functioning properly.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if • Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be effected HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
by load reduction: overloaded power outlets +12V, 115V AC, USB ports)
during certain driving conditions (city driving, tow-
• Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
ing, frequent stopping).
• Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
• Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter elec- What to do when an electrical load reduction action
trical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery
devices. Saver Mode”)
• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long During a trip:
parking periods). • Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
• The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time – Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
(weeks, months). – Check what may be plugged in to power outlets
• The battery was recently replaced and was not charged +12V, 115V AC, USB ports
completely. – Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
– Check the audio settings (volume)
• The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked. After a trip:
• The battery was used for an extended period with the • Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers, (additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio
+12V portable appliances like vacuum cleaner’s, game systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load
consoles and similar devices. and Ignition Off Draw currents).
• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving • Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip A since the
time and parking time). last reset.
• The vehicle should have service performed if the Trip B
message is still present during consecutive trips and
• Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the
the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did
last reset.
not help to identify the cause. 4
• Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip B since the
TRIP COMPUTER last reset.
The Trip Computer is located in the Electronic Vehicle Elapsed Time
Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display
(DID). Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
button until “Trip Info” is highlighted in the EVIC and when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
push the RIGHT arrow button. Push and release time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
the UP or DOWN arrow buttons to highlight or START position.
one of the following functions if you want to reset it: To Reset A Trip Function
Trip A Reset will only occur while a resettable function is
• Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the selected (highlighted). Push and hold the OK button to
last reset. clear the resettable function being displayed.
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND MESSAGES All active telltales will display first, if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
IMPORTANT: The warning/indicator light switches on
in the instrument panel together with a dedicated mes- equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
sage and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as such
must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative
to the information contained in the Owner Manual,
which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.
Always refer to the information in this chapter in the
event of a failure indication.
Red Telltale Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Air Bag Warning Light 4
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is
first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer
to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains un-
buckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will
sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale What It Means

Light
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake 4
application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reser-
voir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
United States the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
Canada booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may
be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac- Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
dropped below a specified level.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
the brake fluid level checked.
inspected by an authorized dealer.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
NOTE: Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It tion.
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale What It Means

Light
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the en- 4
gine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
or a related component.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump-Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency.”
Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the light turns on while driving,
safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return
to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.
NOTE:
As the coolant temperature gauge approaches ⬙H,⬙ this indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound. Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to reach ⬙H.⬙ In this
case, a continuous chime will sound until the engine is allowed to cool or the 4 minutes du-
ration is expired, whichever come first.
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Power Steering System). Re- 4
fer to “Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash de-
pending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be driv-
able; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and
you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/
RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the 4
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the ve-
hicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Vehicle Security Warning Light
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with
severe usage. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
NOTE: Continuous driving with the Transmission Tem- NOTE: If you continue operating the vehicle when the
perature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated
severe transmission damage or transmission failure. you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact
with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped

4
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Red Telltale Light What It Means

Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will turn on when the liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime.
Hood Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the hood is ajar/open and not fully closed.
Yellow Telltale Lights
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light 4
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the igni-
tion switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC
Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the ve-
hicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h),
see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was
turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused
the ESC activation.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
4
Electronic Park Brake Fail Light
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Electronic Park Brake Fail Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Electronic Park Brake is not functioning properly
and that service is required. Contact your authorized dealership.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
The LaneSense is solid yellow when the system senses a lane drift situation.
The LaneSense is flashing yellow when the system senses the lane has been approached and
is in a lane departure situation.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙ in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the LaneSense system is not operating and needs service.
Please see your authorized dealer.
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.4 gal (9.1 L) this light will turn on, and remain 4
on until fuel is added.
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
Adaptive Cruise Control Alert Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Adaptive Cruise Control Alert Indicator Light
This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and needs service. For further informa-
tion, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating.”
Service Forward Collision Warning Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Service Forward Collision Warning Indicator Light
This light indicates a potential system fault with the FCW system. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Forward Collision Off Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Forward Collision Warning is off.
4
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The
light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through sev-
eral typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be ser-
viced as soon as possible if this occurs.
NOTE: Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indica- NOTE: A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as refer-
tor Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine enced above, can reach higher temperatures than in
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic con- drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as
verter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immedi- dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in
ate service is required. death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
4
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible. overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for low tire pressure telltale.
those tires.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse- NOTE: The TPMS has been optimized for the original
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warn-
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys- ing have been established for the tire size equipped on
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety damage may result when using replacement equipment
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermar-
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the ket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket 4
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have
to continue to function properly. your sensor function checked.
Green Telltale Lights
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green
Telltale What It Means
Light
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT turn signal as se-
lected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multi-
function lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Green Telltale
What It Means
Light
LaneSense Indicator Light
The LaneSense indicator is solid green when both lane markings have been detected and
the system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in the EVIC/DID and a torque warning 4
in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to “LaneSense — If
Equipped⬙ in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
KeySense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
What It Means
Light
KeySense Indicator Light
The KeySense indicator is solid green when a KeySense key is detected upon startup of the
vehicle. The indicator will remain lit for the entire key cycle as a reminder that the Key-
Sense key is in use. While the KeySense key is in use, the vehicle will respond to a separate
specific set of settings associated with the KeySense profile. Refer to “Keys⬙ in “Getting to
Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Detected Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
What It Means
Light
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Detected Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control speed is SET and the target ve-
hicle is detected. Refer to ⬙Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped⬙ in ⬙Starting And
Operating⬙ for further information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
What It Means
Light
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control speed is SET and there is no target
vehicle detected. Refer to ⬙Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped⬙ in ⬙Starting And
Operating⬙ for further information.
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
Green Telltale
What It Means
Light
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on. 4
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
What It Means
Light
Front Fog Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
Blue Telltale Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
What It Means
Light
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control
lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to
switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙ scenario.
White Telltale Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
What It Means
Light
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the vehicle equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) has 4
been turned on and in the READY state. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
White Telltale
What It Means
Light
LaneSense Indicator Light
When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense indicator is solid white when none or
only the left or right lane marking has been detected. The indicator will turn green when
both lanes are detected and the system will be ready to provide visual warnings in the in-
strument cluster display if an unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to “LaneSense — If
Equipped⬙ in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
White Telltale
What It Means
Light
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON, but a speed has not been
set..
Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator Light
White Telltale
What It Means
Light
Electronic Speed Control SET Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control speed has been set. Refer to “Speed
Control — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Speed Warning Light — If Equipped
White Warning
What It Means
Light
Speed Warning Light
When Speed Warning is turned on the speed warning telltale will illuminate in the instru- 4
ment cluster, with a number matching the set speed. Each time the set speed is exceeded, an
audible chime will sound for up to 10 seconds, or until the speed is no longer exceeded. The
telltale in the instrument cluster will also change from white to yellow, and a pop up warn-
ing message will pop up on the EVIC/DID screen. Speed Warning can be turned on and off
in the EVIC/DID, for further information refer to “EVIC/DID Display Menu Items” in “Get-
ting To Know Your Instrument Panel”
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard sions well within current government regulations.
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
transmission control systems. When these systems are also store diagnostic codes and other information to
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al- Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not Cybersecurity
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
soon as possible. system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
CAUTION! controls. Authorized service technicians may need to
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause access this information to assist with the diagnosis and
further damage to the emission control system. It service of your vehicle and emissions system.
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices” and
WARNING!
“Uconnect CyberSecurity” in “All About Uconnect Ac-
• ONLY an authorized service technician should con- cess” in your Owner’s Manual Radio Supplement and
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in “Cybersecurity” in “Multimedia”.
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior 4
tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may result
in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including per-
sonal information.
SAFETY
CONTENTS
䡵 ACTIVE SAFETY FEATURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266 ▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .266 ▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). . . . . . . .321
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 5
▫ Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped . .278 ▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373

Mitigation — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 ▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
▫ Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . .293 ▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . .302 ▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features . . . . . . .302
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
266 SAFETY
ACTIVE SAFETY FEATURES • The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop).
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most • Brake pedal pulsations.
braking conditions. The system automatically prevents
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight WARNING!
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises. • The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects ment that may be susceptible to interference
one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such caused by improperly installed or high output
as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, radio transmitting equipment. This interference
or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa- can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capa-
tion(s). bility. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
You also may experience the following when ABS acti-
vates: (Continued)
SAFETY 267
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifi-
cation may result in degraded ABS performance.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position
slow down or stop. and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or 5
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
the traction afforded. service is required. However, the conventional brake
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following System Warning Light” is not on.
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
268 SAFETY
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition Traction Control System (TCS)
switch is turned to the ON position, have the light This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
repaired as soon as possible. the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
Electronic Brake Control System apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differ-
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Elec-
ential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differen-
tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
tial and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start
one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the
Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic
other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
(ERM). These systems work together to enhance both
to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
vehicle stability and control in various driving condi-
enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.
tions.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Ready Alert
Braking (RAB), Rain Brake Support (RBS), Trailer Sway The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
Control (TSC), and Dynamic Steering Torque (DST). capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
SAFETY 269
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the planing. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak- must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
ing pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure the safety of others.
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal 5
Brake System Warning Light
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
WARNING! the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, in- is not functioning properly and that immediate service is
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not
come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
(Continued) position, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
270 SAFETY
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the ESC and EPS This function manages the distribution of the braking
modules that provides torque at the steering wheel for torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
certain driving conditions in which the ESC module is braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent
detecting vehicle instability. The torque that the steering overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability,
wheel receives is only meant to help the driver realize and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the
optimal steering behavior in order to reach/maintain front axle.
vehicle stability. The only notification the driver receives
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
that the feature is active is the torque applied to the
steering wheel. This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
NOTE: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
realize the correct course of action through small torques of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
the DST feature is highly dependent on the drivers applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
very important to realize that this feature will not steer occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it
steering the vehicle. cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
SAFETY 271
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
or other vehicles. counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
WARNING! maintain the desired path.
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi- ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
tions and driving conditions, influence the chance path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appro- 5
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM- understeer condition.
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck- • Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the appropriate for the steering wheel position.
user’s safety or the safety of others.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) appropriate for the steering wheel position.
This system enhances directional control and stability of The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” lo-
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor- cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon
rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by as the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
272 SAFETY
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS
is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
conditions. manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
WARNING! • Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the natural laws of physics from acting on the the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent type and size or wheel size may adversely affect
accidents, including those resulting from excessive ESC performance. Improperly inflated and un-
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or evenly worn tires may also degrade ESC perfor-
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents mance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inap- maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the
propriate driver input for the conditions. Only a ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
(Continued)
SAFETY 273
ESC Operating Modes To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation,
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
ESC On will turn off.
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. When- NOTE: When driving with snow chains, or when starting
ever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this
off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to
mode. This mode should be used for most driving allow more wheel spin. This can be accomplished by 5
conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used formomentarily pushing the “ESC Off” button to enter
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs. partial mode “Partial Off” mode. Once the situation
requiring “Partial Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back
Partial Off
on by momentarily pushing the “ESC Off” button. This
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a may be done while the vehicle is in motion.
more spirited driving experience is desired. This mode
may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation,
which allows for more wheel spin than normally al-
lowed. This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck.
274 SAFETY
position. It should go out with the engine running. If the
WARNING!
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature de- been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on
scribed in the TCS section), has been disabled and after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys- The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
tem is reduced. cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
ESC OFF Indicator Light Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator driving to the prevailing road conditions.
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
SAFETY 275
NOTE: Hill Start Assist (HSA)
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen- complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON. the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue
to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
will be ON even if it was turned off previously. system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds roll down the hill as normal. 5
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver activate:
that caused the ESC activation.
• The feature must be enabled.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the • The vehicle must be stopped.
customer has elected to have the Electronic • Park brake must be off.
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
276 SAFETY
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear). brake operation to ensure safe operation of the ve-
hicle under all road conditions. Your complete atten-
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward tion is always required while driving to maintain
gears. The system will not activate if the transmission safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
a manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA injury.
will remain active.
Towing With HSA
WARNING! HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist while towing a trailer.
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or WARNING!
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
(Continued)
(Continued)
SAFETY 277
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
not be enough brake pressure to hold both the mation.
vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an Rainy Brake Support (RBS)
incline while resuming acceleration, manually ac- Rainy Brake Support may improve braking performance
tivate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal. amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the 5
on the front brake rotors. It functions when the wind-
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle. shield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When Rainy Brake
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
• Failure to follow these warnings can result in a no driver interaction is required.
collision or serious personal injury.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Disabling And Enabling HSA Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
current setting, proceed as follows: It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. The EBC will prepare the brake system for a
panic stop.
278 SAFETY
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
WARNING!
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces-
sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
actions to attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
is recognized. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-
to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
further information. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
engine power may be reduced and you may feel the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to
stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
SAFETY 279
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on
both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
5
NOTE:
• The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de-
Rear Detection Zones tection zones.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
when the vehicle is in PARK.
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in false
280 SAFETY
detections. The BSM warning light may even remain
illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward
gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bum-
per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
Sensor Location
If the system detects degraded performance due to
contamination or foreign objects, a message will warn
you of a blocked sensor and the warning indicators in
side view mirrors will be on. The warning indicators will
remain illuminated until blockage clearing conditions are
met. First clear the fascia area around the sensors of the
SAFETY 281
blockage. After removing the blockage, the following
procedure can be used to reset the system:
• Cycle the ignition from on to off and then back on.
• Ensure that the system detects a blind spot target on
each side while driving above 6 mph (10 km/h).
If the blockage message is still present after cycling the
ignition and driving in traffic, check again for a blockage. 5
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume. Warning Light Location
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” in this section for further The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
information. different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
282 SAFETY
Entering From The Side Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side of the vehicle. side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
SAFETY 283
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
5
Overtaking/Approaching
284 SAFETY
Overtaking/Passing Stationary Objects

The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
berms, snow banks, car washes etc. However, occasion- adjacent lanes.
ally the system may alert on such objects. This is normal
operation and your vehicle does not require service.
SAFETY 285
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
5
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
Opposing Traffic vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
WARNING!
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
(Continued)
286 SAFETY
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver. Additionally, if
the host vehicle is obscured by a flat object on one side
the system can false alert on vehicles approaching from
the opposite direction.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
RCP Detection Zones WARNING!

RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
situations.
(Continued)
SAFETY 287
alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an
audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back- Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
death. the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
Modes Of Operation
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an 5
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul- will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de-
timedia” for further information. tected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only — Default Setting
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM muted.
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode,
the system will respond with both visual and audible When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
288 SAFETY
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio General Information
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
RCP state always requests the chime. that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Blind Spot Alert Off Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
systems. 1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
NOTE: 2. The device must accept any interference received,
• The BSM system will store the current operating mode including interference that may cause undesired op-
when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is eration of the device.
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
used. other than an authorized service facility could void
• The BSM system can work in conjunction with the authorization to use this equipment.
Keysense function of the vehicle if equipped. Refer to
“Keysense Features⬙ in “Getting To Know Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.
SAFETY 289
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
— If Equipped reacts to the warnings by braking and the system deter-
mines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings,
system will compensate and provide additional brake
visual warnings (within the EVIC/DID), and may apply
force as required.
a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential
frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed below
intended to provide the driver with enough time to react, 26 mph (42 km/h), the system may provide the maxi- 5
avoid or mitigate the potential collision. mum braking possible to mitigate the potential forward
collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitiga-
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
tion event stops the vehicle completely, the system will
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
release the brakes.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide a
limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle
290 SAFETY
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW
FCW Message will be deactivated until the next key cycle.
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle • The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
in front of you is no longer probable, the warning the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should
message will be deactivated. be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.
SAFETY 291
Changing the status of the system is only possible with
WARNING!
the vehicle at a complete stop.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
NOTE:
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the • The FCW system state is kept in memory from one key
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it will
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
• FCW can work in conjunction with the Keysense 5
Turning FCW ON Or OFF function of the vehicle if equipped. Refer to “Keysense
Features⬙ in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for
The forward collision menu setting is located in the further information
Uconnect settings.
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On,” this allows the
system to warn you of a possible collision with the The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are
vehicle in front of you. programmable through the Uconnect System. Refer to
Changing the FCW status to “Off” deactivates the sys- mation.
tem, so no warning or active braking will be available in
case of a possible collision
292 SAFETY
The default status of FCW is the “Medium” setting and Changing the Active Braking status to “Off” prevents the
the Active Braking is in the “On” setting. This allows the system from providing autonomous braking, or addi-
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the tional brake support if the driver is not braking ad-
vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings and it equately in the event of a potential frontal collision.
applies autonomous braking.
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Far” setting allows the
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
driver after ignition shut down.
vehicle in front using audible/visual warning when the
latter is at a farther distance than ⬙Medium⬙ setting. This • FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
provides the most reaction time to avoid a possible overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
collision. path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
higher rate of speed.
the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front when the distance between the • FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
vehicle in the front is much closer. This setting provides screens.
less reaction time than the “Far” and “Medium” settings,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
SAFETY 293
FCW Limited Warning Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
If the EVIC/DID displays “ACC/FCW Limited Function- The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
ality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition that mended cold placard pressure.
limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approxi-
drivable under normal conditions, the active braking mately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means
may not be fully available. Once the condition that
that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire
limited the system performance is no longer present, the pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
5
system will return to its full performance state. If the based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for
Service FCW Warning at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
If the system turns off, and the EVIC/DID displays:
must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Maintaining
And Caring For Your Vehicle” for information on how to
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-
the system checked by an authorized dealer. sure.
294 SAFETY
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-
and natural pressure loss through the tire. tion.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turncold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn- (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure pressure is low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off. Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
Telltale Light” will turn off only after the tires are inflated
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
The system will automatically update and the “Tire value.
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the
SAFETY 295
CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

• The TPMS has been optimized for the original moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and which could damage the TPMS sensor.
warning have been established for the tire size
NOTE:
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using • The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
replacement equipment that is not of the same size, and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire 5
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause failure or condition.
sensor damage.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
while adjusting your tire pressure.
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to be-
come inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire • Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
sealant it is recommended that you take your tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underin-
vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your flation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
sensor function checked. and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al- ability.
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
(Continued)
296 SAFETY
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure The TPMS consists of the following components:
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level
• Receiver Module
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light”. • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
the tire.
Base System The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “LOW TIRE
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to PRESSURE” message will display in the instrument
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each cluster, an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will be displayed and
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
readings to the receiver module. more of the four active road tires. Should this occur, you
should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
and to maintain the proper pressure.
value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the
SAFETY 297
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Moni- when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault
toring Telltale Light” will turn off. can occur due to any of the following:
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may 1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order TPMS sensors.
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes 5
that affects radio wave signals.
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information. 3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
Service TPMS Warning
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
also sound a chime. If the ignition is cycled, this sequence Vehicles With Compact Spare
will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The 1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moni-
tor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
298 SAFETY
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size off, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure pressure warning limit in any of the four active road
below the low-pressure warning limit, a chime will tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
PRESSURE” and ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ messages will turn on TPMS to receive this information.
upon the next ignition cycle.
Premium System — If Equipped
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
solid. wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will sound readings to the receiver module.
and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off for NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
75 seconds and then remain on solid. tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and and to maintain the proper pressure.
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
or non-matching full size spare, the TPMS will update
automatically and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will turn
SAFETY 299
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID).
5
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will Tire Pressure Monitoring System
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a
four active road tires. In addition, the EVIC/DID will different color in the EVIC/DID graphic) to the vehicle’s
display an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message and a graphic showing recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in
the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the system receives the
values in a different color. updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
300 SAFETY
update, the pressure values in the graphic display in the longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
EVIC/DID will return to their original color, and the Light” will no longer flash, and the “SERVICE SYSTEM
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off. message will no longer display, and a pressure value will
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive due to any of the following:
this information.
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
Service TPMS Warning facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure TPMS sensors.
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will that affects radio wave signals.
also sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC/DID will
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
display a ⬙SERVICE SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of
five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the housings.
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
received.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, pro-
viding the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
SAFETY 301
Vehicles With Compact Spare 4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will
sound, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moni-
EVIC/DID will display a “SERVICE SYSTEM” mes-
tor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
sage for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road place of the pressure value.
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
ing limit, upon the next ignition cycle, the “TPMS 5
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
Telltale Light” will remain on and a chime will sound.
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
In addition, the graphic in the EVIC/DID will still
“TPMS Telltale Light” will turn off and the graphic in
display a different color pressure value and an ⬙Inflate
the EVIC/DID will display a new pressure value
to XX⬙ message.
instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
solid. In addition, the EVIC/DID will display a “SER- in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
VICE SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
302 SAFETY
General Information Occupant Restraint Systems Features
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and • Seat Belt Systems
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
following two conditions:
• Child Restraints
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
Important Safety Precautions
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera- Please pay close attention to the information in this
tion. section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
possible.
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment. Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
Some of the most important safety features in your buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
vehicle are the restraint systems:
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
SAFETY 303
move the seat as far back as possible and use the 7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”) back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chil- side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
dren who do not use child restraints or belt- between occupants and the door and occupants could
positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled be injured. 5
up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
them or under their arm. the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
WARNING!
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
shoulder belts properly. an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
(Continued)
304 SAFETY
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child be belted at all times.
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint. Driver And Passenger BeltAlert (If Equipped)
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
with a rear seat. and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
Seat Belt Systems their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active when-
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even ever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver position.
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
Initial Indication
happen far away from home or on your own street.
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
turned to the START or ON/RUN position, an intermit-
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
tent chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the
ignition switch is first turned to the START or ON/RUN
SAFETY 305
position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buck- belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occu-
led. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not pants to buckle their seat belts.
active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccu-
Change Of Status
pied.
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, 5
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is un- belts are buckled again.
buckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
BeltAlert). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended
on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
306 SAFETY
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho- will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti- vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
vating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
WARNING!
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with out- • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
board front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
are buckled. Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Lap/Shoulder Belts air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
lap/shoulder belts. led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoul- vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under vehicle are buckled up properly.
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
(Continued)
SAFETY 307

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or • Two people should never be belted into a single
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
or killed. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your than one person, no matter what their size.
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
belts. injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at 5
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
using a seat belt properly. abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
injuries in a collision much worse. You might • A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
safe, too. it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
308 SAFETY

• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle • A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could you from injury during a collision. You are more
ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter- likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
buckle nearest you. are meant to be used together.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you • A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
your seat belt snugly. frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. placed immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck replaced after a collision.
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)
SAFETY 309
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the 5
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate

3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
310 SAFETY
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
SAFETY 311
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
fully.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure In the front and second row outboard seats the shoulder
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the
shoulder belt. seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze the
anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the 5
up or down to the position that serves you best.
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to
create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
312 SAFETY
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release but-
ton. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
Third Row Center Belt Operating Instructions
The third row center seat belt features a seat belt with a
mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows the seat belt to
detach from the lower anchor when the seat is folded.
Adjustable Anchorage The mini-latch plate and regular latch plate can then be
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will stored out of the way in the headliner for added conve-
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, nience to open up utilization of the storage areas behind
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the the front seats when the seat is not occupied.
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
SAFETY 313
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate 2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over
from its stowed position in the headliner slightly the seat.
behind the third row seat.
Mini-Latch Plate
Mini-Latch Stowage
314 SAFETY
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the left head 4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
restraint. mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a
“click.”
Mini-Latch And Buckle Connected

Connect Mini-Latch To Buckle
SAFETY 315
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled

1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
2 — Seat Belt Buckle
1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch 7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
316 SAFETY
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the
WARNING!
lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the seat belt in a collision. • If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is properly connected when the seat belt is used by an
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retrac- occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide
tor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt. proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the • When reattaching the mini-latch plate and mini-
buckle. buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini- If the webbing is twisted, follow the preceding
buckle for storage, insert the regular latch plate into procedure to detach the mini-latch plate and mini-
the center red slot on the mini-buckle. The seat belt buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach the
will automatically retract to its stowed position. If mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.
necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to Seat Belt Extender
allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the mini-
latch plate and regular latch plate into its stowed If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
position. the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
SAFETY 317
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu-
pant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat 5
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
if they are wearing a seat belt.
318 SAFETY
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck. sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
the arm.
Energy Management Feature
Seat Belt Pretensioner This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning Management feature in the front seating positions that
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners manner.
work for all size occupants, including those in child
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) —
restraints.
If Equipped
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
worn snugly and positioned properly. (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
SAFETY 319
Restraints” section of this manual. The table below
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
8 Passenger With Stow N Go Second Row Seats

• ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
7 Passenger With Stow N Go Second Row Seats
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
320 SAFETY
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch facing child restraint.
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙ • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
Children 12 years old and under should always be the entire seat belt is extracted.
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
WARNING!
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
(Continued)
SAFETY 321
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
locking mode.
Air Bag System Components
WARNING! Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea- • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
ture or any other seat belt function is not working • Air Bag Warning Light
properly when checked according to the proce- 5
dures in the Service Manual. • Steering Wheel and Column
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could • Instrument Panel
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain • Knee Impact Bolsters
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children • Advanced Front Air Bags
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing • Supplemental Side Air Bags
child restraints that have a harness for restraining • Supplemental Knee Air Bags
the child.
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
322 SAFETY
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Classification System
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Impact Bolster
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The Locations
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
the air bag covers. 1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Passenger
Knee Air Bag
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air
Bag
SAFETY 323
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
WARNING!
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument which may receive information from the front impact
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment sensors or other system components.
could cause serious injury, including death. Air The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
instrument panel. output is used for more severe collisions. 5
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear- inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
facing child restraint. seat position.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
with a rear seat. passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
Advanced Front Air Bag Features the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage Advanced Front Air Bags.
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
324 SAFETY
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger
Occupant Classification System (“OCS”) that is designed
to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output designed to open only when the air bags are
appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as inflating.
determined by the OCS. • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
WARNING! with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Al-
• No objects should be placed over or near the air ways wear your seat belts even though you have air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel bags.
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
air bag to inflate. Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag tional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Ad-
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
damage the air bags and you could be injured of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Ad-
because the air bags may no longer be functional. vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are collisions, including some that may produce substantial
(Continued)
SAFETY 325
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
severe initial deceleration.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration 5
Passenger Seat
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for
have deployed. this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger Ad-
vanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occu-
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli- pant’s seated weight, as determined by the OCS.
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag. The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the
following:
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
326 SAFETY
• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger
located in the front passenger seat Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if
• Air Bag Warning Light
the OCS estimates that:
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located light objects on it; or
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is lo-
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pas-
cated beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any
senger, including a child; or
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM
uses input from the Sensor to determine the front pas- • The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
senger’s most probable classification. The OCM commu- child restraint; or
nicates this information to the ORC. The ORC may
• The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
Air Bag deployment based on occupant classification. In
order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important
for the front passenger to be seated properly and prop-
erly wearing the seat belt.
SAFETY 327
Front Passenger Seat Front Passenger Air including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front pas-
Occupant Status Bag Output senger seat.
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deploy-
ment
WARNING!
Child, including a child in Reduced-power deploy- • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
a forward-facing child re- ment OR Full-power de- an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
straint or booster seat* ployment Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear- 5
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment
OR reduced-power de- facing child restraint.
ployment • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deploy-
• Children 12 years or younger should always ride
ment
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on
passenger seat and never install a child restraint system, the front passenger seat and where that weight is located.
The OCS communicates the classification status to the
328 SAFETY
ORC. The ORC uses the classification to determine
whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation
rate should be adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated properly
and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated
passengers are:
• Sitting upright
• Facing forward
• Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort-
ably on or near the floor Seated Properly
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
• Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
seatback in an upright position When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult,
occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce
the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag. This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly.
SAFETY 329
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
seated weight on the front passenger seat
• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instru-
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so ment panel).
may result in serious injury or death. The OCS deter-
• The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns
mines the most probable classification of the occupant
to face the rear of the vehicle.
that it detects.
• The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright 5
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or
position.
increased seated weight, which may result in an adjusted
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in • The front passenger carries or holds an object while
a collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
improperly.
• Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the
• Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
and center console.
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the • Accessories that may change the seated weight on the
front passenger seat may result in a full-power deploy- front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger
ment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. seat.
330 SAFETY
• Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly

SAFETY 331
Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly

332 SAFETY
signal to the OCS that is different from the occu-
pant’s properly seated weight input. This may
result in serious injury or death in a collision.
• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with
the seatback in an upright position, your back
against the seatback, sitting upright, facing for-
ward, in the center of the seat, with your feet
comfortably on or near the floor.
• Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat.
Not Seated Properly Holding an object may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different than the occupant’s prop-
WARNING! erly seated weight input, which may result in
• If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated serious injury or death in a collision.
improperly, the occupant may provide an output • Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working
(Continued)
(Continued)
SAFETY 333
Do not make any modifications to the front passenger
seat components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the
properly, which may result in serious injury or seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason,
death in a collision. Do not place any objects on the take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only FCA US
floor under the front passenger seat. LLC approved seat accessories may be used.
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel The following requirements must be strictly followed:
will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or 5
front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS
components in any way.
may affect the operation of the air bag system.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come on, or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as
specific model being repaired. Always use the correct
you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
service immediately.
• Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS com-
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
ponents that may affect the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly • Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the
OCS components must function as designed.
334 SAFETY
• At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System Knee Impact Bolsters
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
be modified or replaced with any part except those driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
which are approved by FCA US LLC. pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to WARNING!
the passenger seat assembly, its related components, • Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the bolsters in any way.
air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This • Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
could result in death or serious injury to the front bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A radios, etc.
modified vehicle may not comply with required
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards Air Bags
(CMVSS).
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column and a Supplemental Passenger Knee Air
SAFETY 335
Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the glove
compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working
together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and Advanced
Front Air Bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
5
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG”
label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover
events, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-
board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
336 SAFETY
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
pushed into you, causing serious injury. Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
“AIRBAG.”
body structure.
SAFETY 337
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side win-
WARNING!
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs • Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned (SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an high enough to block the deployment of the
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. SABICs. The trim covering above the side win-
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or dows where the SABIC and its deployment path 5
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side are located should remain free from any obstruc-
windows in certain rollover or side impact events. tions.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
338 SAFETY
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) de- occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
termines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate, be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle that is appropriate for the size of the child.
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed. WARNING!
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint • Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to against the door or window. Sit upright in the
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are center of the seat.
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously • Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should ment could cause you to be severely injured or
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or killed.
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an • Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
infant or child restraint. more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
(Continued)
SAFETY 339
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
though you have Side Air Bags. angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
Front Air Bags deploy.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. Rollover Events
5
Side Impacts Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro-
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the
Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side The rollover sensing system determines if a rollover
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. event may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a roll-
over or near rollover event, and deployment of the Side
340 SAFETY
Air Bags is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
also deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both sides of significantly within a few days, or if you have any
the vehicle. blistering, see your doctor immediately.
If A Deployment Occurs • As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment. process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
the air bag system. throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
or all of the following may occur:
structions for cleaning.
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric-
bags will not be in place to protect you.
tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
SAFETY 341
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
WARNING!
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot tem perform the following functions:
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, • Cut off fuel to the engine.
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme- • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
System serviced as well. lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
5
button.
NOTE:
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, the battery has power.
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Unlock the power door locks.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately. Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
Enhanced Accident Response System
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition
342 SAFETY
OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
engine compartment and on the ground near the engine may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
and starting the engine.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
Air Bag Warning Light instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your
protection in a collision. The Occupant Re- the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal-
straint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
with air bag system electrical components.
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of again after initial startup.
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc-
the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate. tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
SAFETY 343
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
WARNING!
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
first turned to the ON/RUN position. to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
eight-second interval. on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the 5
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or air bag system immediately.
remains on while driving. Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition Restraint System (“SRS”), the Redundant Air
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec- Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the in-
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag strument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
system immediately. will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected.
344 SAFETY
If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. For modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
Warning Light, refer to “Warning/Indicator Lights and • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
Messages” in “Getting to Know Your Instrument Panel” bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
section of this manual. works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
Maintaining Your Air Bag System system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
WARNING! Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system air bag system service. If your seat, including your
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
be injured if the air bag system is not there to way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
protect you. Do not modify the components or seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
abilities, contact your authorized dealer.
(Continued)
SAFETY 345
Event Data Recorder (EDR) These data can help provide a better understanding of
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of 5
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
is designed to record such data as: crash investigation.
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating; To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
were buckled/fastened;
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the ment, can read the information if they have access to the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, vehicle or the EDR.
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
346 SAFETY
Child Restraints
WARNING!
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian hold even an infant on your lap could become so
province, requires that small children ride in proper great that you could not hold the child, no matter
restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be pros- how strong you are. The child and others could be
ecuted for ignoring it. badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
SAFETY 347
There are different sizes and types of restraints for NOTE:
children from newborn size to the child almost large
• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
call 1-866-732-8243.
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the • Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/eng/
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
restraint. 5
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
348 SAFETY
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

Infants and Children who are two years old or Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Toddlers younger and who have not reached the Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
height or weight limits of their child re- seat of the vehicle
straint
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
who have out-grown the height or weight five-point Harness, facing forward in the
limit of their rear-facing child restraint rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the ve-
forward-facing child restraint, but are too hicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt vehicle
Children Too Large Children 12 years old or younger, who Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
for Child Restraints have out-grown the height or weight limit the vehicle
of their booster seat
SAFETY 349
Infants And Child Restraints
WARNING!
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle 5
It is recommended for children from birth until they with a rear seat.
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
350 SAFETY
Older Children And Child Restraints
WARNING!
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear support their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
leg in this vehicle. The floor of this vehicle is not
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
designed to manage the crash forces of this type of car
seat. In a crash, the support leg may not function as it convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
was designed by the car seat manufacturer, and your tion are for children who are over two years old or who
child may be more severely injured as a result. have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
SAFETY 351
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
WARNING! the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
collision. The child could be badly injured or serious personal injury.
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s 5
directions exactly when installing an infant or Children Too Large For Booster Seats
child restraint. Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward over the front of the seat when their back is against the
because it can loosen the child restraint attach- seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has vehicle’s seat belt alone:
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
(Continued) the vehicle seat?
352 SAFETY
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
WARNING!
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back? Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
between their neck and arm? will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
the child’s thighs and not their stomach? correctly.
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
SAFETY 353
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
Weight of the LATCH – Seat Belt Only LATCH – Seat Belt + Top
Child + Child Lower Anchors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor
Restraint Only + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X 5
Child Restraint (29.5 kg)
Rear-Facing More than X
Child Restraint 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X
Child Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing More than X
Child Restraint 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
354 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
(LATCH) Restraint System age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
SAFETY 355
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
8 Passenger With Stow N Go

• Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
7 Passenger With Stow N Go
• Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
356 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Frequently Asked Questions

What is the weight limit (child’s 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system
weight + weight of the child re- until the combined weight of the
straint) for using the LATCH an- child and the child restraint is
chorage system to attach the child 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
restraint? and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and No Do not use the seat belt when you
the seat belt be used together to use the LATCH anchorage system
attach a rear-facing or forward- to attach a rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraint? facing child restraint.
SAFETY 357

Can two child restraints be at- No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
tached using a common lower with two or more child restraints.
LATCH anchorage? If the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchor-
ages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the 5
LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint Yes The child seat may touch the back
touch the back of the front passen- of the front passenger seat if the
ger seat? child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact. See your child re-
straint owner’s manual for more
information.
358 SAFETY

Can the head restraints be re- Yes The 2nd row head restraints on
moved? bench and fixed quad seats and in
the center seat (if equipped), are
removable. 2nd row outboard stow
’n go head restraints are not re-
movable. The 3rd row center head
restraint is removable in all ve-
hicles, but the 3rd row outboard
head restraints are not removable.
NOTE: If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint in-
WARNING!
terferes with the installation of the child restraint, the
head restraint may be folded and the child seat installed Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright
in front of it. position when the seat is to be used by an occupant
who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with
the head restraint in its lowered position could result
in serious injury or death in a collision.
SAFETY 359
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym-
bols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion. 5
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages Shown)

360 SAFETY
right outboard position and in the center of the 60% seat
for either the center or left outboard seating position. All
tether anchorages are located on the back of the seat, near
the floor.
LATCH Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorages

Shown)
Locating Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages located be- Tether Strap Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorage
Shown)
hind all second row seating positions. The third
row has a tether anchor on the 40% seat for the
SAFETY 361
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten 5
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
This vehicle has 4 lower LATCH anchorages in the third
row, rear seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the right
outboard position behind the front passenger (1). An- Center Seat LATCH Positions
chorages C and D are used for the center seating position If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks
(2). The left outboard position (3) does not have lower the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position,
anchorages. Do not install a child restraint using anchor- do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the
ages B and C. This is not a LATCH position in your
vehicle.
362 SAFETY
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or To install a LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
position. matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
WARNING! “Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
• Use anchorages C and D to install a LATCH- to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
compatible child restraint in the center seating 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
child restraint using anchorages B and C. This is easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
not a LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle. anchorages.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing 2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” that seating position. For some second row seats, you
for typical installation instructions. may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
Always follow the directions of the child restraint forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
all child restraint systems will be installed as described child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
here. to allow more room for the child seat.
SAFETY 363
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat- When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
ing position. child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the used by other occupants or being used to secure child
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
tions to attach a tether anchor. installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of 5
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac- behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
turer’s instructions. child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) them.
in any direction.
364 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
WARNING!
Belt
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re- equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed. (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to with- “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description under “Occupant Restraint Systems”
for additional information on ALR.
SAFETY 365
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
8 Passenger With Second Row Stow N Go Seats

• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
• Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
7 Passenger With Second Row Stow N Go Seats
366 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Question About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts

What is the weight limit (child’s weight + Weight limit of the Always use the tether anchor when using
weight of the child restraint) for using the Child Restraint the seat belt to install a forward facing
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a child restraint, up to the recommended
forward facing child restraint? weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch Yes Contact between the front passenger seat
the back of the front passenger seat? and the child restraint is allowed, if the
child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The 2nd row head restraints on bench and
fixed quad seats, and in the center seat (if
equipped) are removable. 2nd row stow ’n
go head restraints are not removable. The
3rd row center head restraint is removable
in all vehicles, but the 3rd row outboard
head restraints are not removable.
SAFETY 367

Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating
the seat belt against the belt path of the position with an ALR retractor.
child restraint?
NOTE: If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint in- Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
terferes with the installation of the child restraint, the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
head restraint may be folded and the child seat installed
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating 5
in front of it.
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
WARNING! better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
position when the seat is to be used by an occupant rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with You may also move the front seat forward to allow
the head restraint in its lowered position could result more room for the child seat.
in serious injury or death in a collision. 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
368 SAFETY
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
“click.” seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
against the child seat.
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of attach a tether anchor.
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
in any direction.
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
SAFETY 369
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Tether Anchorage Attachment
Anchorage:
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
WARNING! You may need to move the seat forward to provide
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
to any location in front of the car seat, including the tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether is available. 5
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of ap-
proved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
370 SAFETY
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
Top Tether Anchorage Locations 3rd Row restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
SAFETY 371
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, 5
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Attachment (Second Row Third Row Tether Attachment
Anchorage Shown)
The tether anchorage found on the back of the 60% seat in
the third row may be used by either the left outboard or
the center seating position. Only tether one child restraint
to the tether anchorage at a time.
372 SAFETY
To connect the tether strap hook to the tether anchorage
for either seating position on the 60% third row seat:
1. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
2. If the car seat is in the center, raise the center head
restraint and route the tether strap around the inboard
(right) side of the head restraint support posts, as
shown in the diagram.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child Center Tether Strap Attachment – 3rd row
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
SAFETY 373
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
5
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
Outboard Tether Strap Attachments – 3rd Row NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
Do not connect the tether strap for more than one
child restraint to the tether anchorage on the 60% seat
in the third row. This anchorage is intended for one
child restraint at a time.
374 SAFETY
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked WARNING!
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
cause serious injury or death.
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
follow these safety tips:
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat confined areas any longer than needed to move
belts. your vehicle in or out of the area.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and • If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
using a seat belt properly. rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)
SAFETY 375
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling Seat Belts
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
blower at high speed. cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
system.
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust 5
system. Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, Air Bag Warning Light
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four to
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
376 SAFETY
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault WARNING!
is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant
sonal injury.
Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
Defroster attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to secured to prevent them from moving and interfer-
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your ing with the pedals or the ability to control the
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper- vehicle.
able. • Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
Floor Mat Safety Information of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they (Continued)
SAFETY 377
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have Tires
been removed for cleaning. Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob- lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle 5
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
control. (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly in-
stalled, if not equipped from the factory. Lights
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
mounting can cause interference with the brake exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
control of the vehicle. panel.
378 SAFETY
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .388
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
▫ Cold Weather Operation ▫ Electric Park Brake (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384 6
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .394
▫ Extended Park Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
▫ Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
▫ After Starting — Warming Up The Engine . . . .385
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .396
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
▫ Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .396
▫ To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
START/STOP Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
䡵 ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION . . . . . . . . . . .404
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .386
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .405 ▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406 ▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 ▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409 ▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .419
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409 ▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409 ▫ ACC Operation At Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF ▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .424
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .425
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .411
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .428
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .412
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
▫ To Activate/Deactivate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF ▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . .459
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ Service The ParkSense Park Assist System . . . .460
▫ ParkSense Visual Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . .461
▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . .461
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . .443
䡵 PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
6
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
▫ Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . .445 Park Assist System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . .445 ▫ Parallel Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
䡵 PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 ▫ Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
䡵 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
▫ ParkSense Visual Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
▫ LaneSense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487 ▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
▫ Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF. . . . . . . . . . . .489
▫ Vehicle Loading Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
▫ LaneSense Warning Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ Changing LaneSense Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494 ▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
䡵 SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — IF 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .521
䡵 REFUELING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
▫ Recreational Towing — All Models . . . . . . . . .522
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
䡵 DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts. Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
WARNING! trols, or move the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Start the engine with the gear selector in the NEUTRAL
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
or PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
driving range.
access to an unlocked vehicle. 6
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is Normal Starting
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil- is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
dren should be warned not to touch the parking pedal.
brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selec-
tor. To Turn On The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or Button
in a location accessible to children, and do not 1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
(Continued)
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the • Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
ENGINE START/STOP button once. the ignition to the ACC position (EVIC/DID will
display “ACC”),
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will • Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
disengage automatically after 10 seconds. to place the ignition to the RUN position (EVIC/DID
will display “ON/RUN”),
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again. • Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF position (EVIC/DID will
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driv-
display “OFF”).
er’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
Position) Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
and START. To change the ignition positions without able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these
Extended Park Starting
steps:
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
• Starting with the ignition in the OFF position,
has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery After Starting — Warming Up The Engine
to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle. The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it decrease as the engine warms up.
when the engine starts. If Engine Fails To Start
3. If the engine fails to start within ten seconds, cycle the
ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait five WARNING!
seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the
Extended Park Starting procedure. • Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
6
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat serious personal injury.
the procedure. • Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
CAUTION! mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank con-
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
tinuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10
and vehicle.
to 15 seconds before trying again.
(Continued)
The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC
position until the gear selector is in PARK and the
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster button is pushed twice to the OFF position. If the gear
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type STOP button is pushed once, the EVIC/DID will
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the
to “Jump-Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” for engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out
further information. of the PARK position, or it could roll.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
START/STOP Button (engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
OFF position.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
START/STOP button must be held for two seconds or The engine block heater warms the engine and permits
three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed quicker starts in cold weather.
above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet 4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the
with a grounded, three-wire extension cord. Velcro strap and properly stow away behind the
passenger’s side headlamp.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the engine
block heater is recommended. For ambient temperatures NOTE:
below -20°F (-29°C), the engine block heater is required.
• The engine block heater cord is a factory installed
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood, option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords
behind to the passenger’s side headlamp. Follow the are available from your authorized MOPAR dealer.
steps below to properly use the engine block heater:
• The engine block heater will require 110 Volts AC and
6
1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the pas- 6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.
senger’s side headlamp).
• The engine block heater must be plugged in at least
2. Undo the Velcro strap that secures the heater cord in one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the
place. engine.
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into
a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
WARNING!
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
electrical cord could cause electrocution. the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Dealer Service” in “Maintaining And Caring For Your
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS Vehicle.”
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
CAUTION!
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or in the engine or damage may result.
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri- not interpreted as a problem.
mental and should be avoided.
PARKING BRAKE
Electric Park Brake (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Park Brake
System (EPB) that offers simple operation, and some
additional features that make the park brake more con-
venient and useful.
The park brake is primarily intended to prevent the
vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
vehicle, make sure that the park brake is applied. Also, be 6
certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
You can engage the park brake in two ways; Electric Park Brake Switch
• Manually, by applying the park brake switch. To apply the park brake manually, push the switch
momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from
• Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake fea- the back of the vehicle while the park brake engages.
ture in the customer programmable features section of Once the park brake is fully engaged, the BRAKE warn-
the Uconnect Settings. ing lamp in the instrument cluster and an indicator on
The park brake switch is located in the instrument panel. the switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake
pedal while you apply the park brake, you may notice a The park brake will release automatically when the
small amount of brake pedal movement. The park brake ignition is cycled to the RUN position, the transmission is
can be applied even when the ignition switch is OFF, in DRIVE or REVERSE, and the driver seat belt is
however, it can only be released when the ignition switch buckled.
in the ACC or RUN position. To release the parking brake manually, the ignition
NOTE: The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB switch must be in the RUN position. Press on the brake
switch is held for longer than 180 seconds. The light will pedal, then push the park brake switch momentarily. You
extinguish upon releasing the switch. may hear a slight whirring sound from the back of the
vehicle while the parking brake disengages. You may
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking
also notice a small amount of movement in the brake
brake will automatically engage whenever the transmis-
pedal. Once the park brake is fully disengaged, The
sion is placed into PARK. Once the park brake is en-
BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the
gaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument
LED indicator on the switch will extinguish.
cluster and the LED indicator on the switch will illumi-
nate. If your foot is on the brake pedal, you may notice a
small amount of brake pedal movement while the park-
ing brake is engaging.
NOTE: When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and
away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the park • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
make it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. number of reasons. A child or others could be
The park brake should always be applied whenever the seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
driver is not in the vehicle. warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
WARNING! • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, (or 6
in a location accessible to children), and do not
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake child could operate power windows, other controls,
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move- or move the vehicle.
ment and possible injury or damage. • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the Key Fob failure and a collision.
from the vehicle, and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to
engage the park brake while the vehicle is in motion,
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav- push on the electric park brake switch for as long as
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or engagement is desired. The BRAKE warning lamp will
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in illuminate, and a continuous chime will sound. The rear
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll stop lamps will also be illuminated automatically while
and cause damage or injury. the vehicle remains in motion.
• Driving the vehicle with the parking brake en-
gaged, or repeated use of the parking brake to slow To disengage the park brake while the vehicle is in
the vehicle may cause serious damage to the brake motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a
system. complete stop using the park brake, when the vehicle
reaches approximately 3 mph (4.8 km/h), the park brake
will remain engaged.
CAUTION!
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the Electric Park
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with Brake system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate.
the parking brake released, a brake system malfunc- This may be accompanied by the BRAKE warning lamp
tion is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by flashing. In this case, urgent service of the electric park
an authorized dealer immediately. brake system is required. Do not rely on the park brake to
hold the vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake and brake pedal is pressed. Once manually bypassed,
SafeHold will be enabled again once the vehicle reaches
The Electric Park Brake can be programmed to be applied
12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled to the OFF
automatically whenever the vehicle is at a standstill and
position and back to ON again.
the automatic transmission is placed in PARK. Auto Park
Brake is enabled and disabled by customer selection Brake Service Mode
through the “Customer Programmable Features” section
We recommend having your brakes serviced by your
of the “Uconnect Settings”.
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for
SafeHold which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park Brake You should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake 6
System that will engage the park brake automatically if service.
the vehicle is left unsecured. If the automatic transmis-When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for
sion is not in PARK, the seat belt is unbuckled, the driver
you or your technician to push the rear piston into the
door is open, the vehicle is at a standstill, and there is no
rear caliper bore. With the Electric Park Brake system,
attempt to depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedal, this can only be done after retracting the Electric Park
the park brake will automatically engage to prevent the Brake actuator. Fortunately, actuator retraction can be
vehicle from rolling. done easily by entering the “Brake Service” through the
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing the “Uconnect Settings” in your vehicle. This menu based
Electric Park Brake Switch while the driver door is open
system will guide you through the steps necessary to • Apply the Electric Park Brake Switch.
retract the EPB actuator in order to perform rear brake
service. WARNING!
Brake Service Mode has requirements that must be met in You can be badly injured working on or around a
order to be activated: motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
• The vehicle must be at a standstill. you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
• The park brake must be unapplied. service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
• The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL. chanic.
While in service mode, the Electric Park Brake fault lamp AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
will flash continuously while the ignition switch is ON.
When brake service work is complete, the following steps CAUTION!
must be followed to reset the parking brake system to Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
normal operation: ing precautions are not observed:
• Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill. • Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU- • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
speed. you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
is firmly pressing the brake pedal. parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
WARNING! When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the trans-
mission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle 6
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL against unwanted movement.
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If • When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the Key Fob
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re- from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
someone or something. Only shift into gear when access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
the engine is idling normally and your foot is be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
firmly pressing the brake pedal. number of reasons. A child or others could be
(Continued) (Continued)
transmission in PARK. This system also locks the trans-
mission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be OFF position.
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector. Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
in a location accessible to children), and do notInterlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift
A child could operate power windows, other con- the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
trols, or move the vehicle. running and the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake
pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or
shifting out of PARK. moving at low speeds.
Ignition Park Interlock Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission
This vehicle is equipped with a Ignition Park Interlock The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the gear selector located on the center console. The transmis-
engine can be turned off. This helps the driver avoid sion gear selector has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the DRIVE, and LOW shift positions. Using the LOW posi-
tion manually downshifts the transmission to a lower
gear based on vehicle speed. The transmission gear range NOTE: In the event of a mismatch between the gear
(PRNDL) is displayed both above the gear selector and in selector position and the actual transmission gear (for
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or the example, driver selects PARK while driving), the position
Driver Information Display (DID). To select a gear range, indicator will blink continuously until the selector is
simply rotate the gear selector. Push down on the gear returned to the proper position, or the requested shift can
selector and then rotate it, to access the L position. You be completed.
must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
out of PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
speeds (refer to ⬙Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock Sys- vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal 6
tem⬙ in this section). To shift past multiple gear ranges at condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear hundred miles (kilometers).
selector to the appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range
for normal driving. The nine-speed transmission has been developed to meet
the needs of current and future FWD/AWD vehicles.
Software and calibration is refined to optimize the cus-
tomer’s driving experience and fuel economy. By design,
some vehicle and driveline combinations utilize 9th gear
only in very specific driving situations and conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the Gear Ranges
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when NEUTRAL into another gear range.
shifting between these gears.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
Transmission Gear Selector brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
WARNING! the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move- you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is 6
ment and possible injury or damage. running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
if it is not in PARK. Make sure the transmission is turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
in PARK before leaving the vehicle. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL transmission is locked in PARK, securing the ve-
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If hicle against unwanted movement.
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!

• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the • Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the Key Fob PARK, you must start the engine and also press the
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with could result.
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to • DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
number of reasons. A child or others could be can damage the drivetrain.
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal The following indicator should be used to ensure that
or the transmission gear selector. you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or tion:
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. • With brake pedal released, look at the transmission
A child could operate power windows, other con- gear position display and verify that it indicates the
trols, or move the vehicle. PARK position (P).
REVERSE (R)
CAUTION!
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
stop. reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
NEUTRAL (N) Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
periods with the engine running. The engine may be further information.
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
DRIVE (D) 6
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
This range should be used for most city and highway
WARNING! driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-
practices that limit your response to changing traffic tics under all normal operating conditions.
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision. If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat-
ing limits, the transmission controller may modify the
transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque,
and/or expand the range of torque converter clutch LOW (L)
engagement. This is done to prevent transmission dam- Use this range for engine braking when descending very
age due to overheating. steep grades. In this range, the transmission will down-
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the ⬙Transmis- shift for increased engine braking. To access the LOW
sion Temperature Warning Light⬙ will illuminate, a warn- position, push down on the gear selector and rotate it
ing message will appear in the EVIC/DID and the fully clockwise.
transmission may operate differently until the transmis- Transmission Limp Home Mode
sion cools down.
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
be modified depending on engine and transmission result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im- Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to operate only in a fixed gear, or may remain in NEUTRAL.
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illumi-
converter clutch, and shifts into 8th or 9th gear, are nated. Limp Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be
inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam-
“Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section). aging the transmission.
Normal operation will resume once the transmission
temperature has risen to a suitable level.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
following steps: earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
1. Stop the vehicle.
recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, dealer service is required.
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
Torque Converter Clutch
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
turns OFF. included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. 6
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds. A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
5. Restart the engine. different feeling or response during normal operation in
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
operation.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until POWER STEERING
the transmission fluid is warm (usually after 1 to 3 miles The electric power steering system will give you good
[2 to 5 km] of driving). Because the engine speed is higher vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If
cold. This is normal. The torque converter clutch will the electric steering system experiences a fault that
function normally once the transmission is sufficiently reduces assist or prevents the vehicle from providing
warm. assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION manually.
Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise Cancella- WARNING!

tion System. This system is designed to address exhaust
and engine noise. The system relies on four microphones Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
embedded in the headliner, which monitor exhaust and a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
engine noise, and assists an onboard frequency generator, obtained as soon as possible.
which creates counteracting sound waves in the audio
system’s speakers. This helps keep the vehicle quiet at
idle and during drive.
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING⬙ OR
⬙POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
SYSTEM” message and a steering wheel icon operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
are displayed on the EVIC/DID screen, it indicates that
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of
the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It the steering wheel.
is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance.
Refer to “Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
NOTE: 6
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down if
multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the
same time. If this occurs, the Speed Control System can
be reactivated by pushing the Speed Control ON/OFF
button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the Speed Control.
The Cruise Indicator Light in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display
(DID) will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the
Speed Control Buttons ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise Indicator
1 — ON/OFF 4 — SET-/DECEL Light will turn off. The system should be turned off when
2 — SET+/ACCEL 5 — CANCEL not in use.
3 — RESUME
To Vary The Speed Setting
WARNING!
To Increase Speed
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in
use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
system or cause it to go faster than you want. You pushing the SET + button.
could lose control and have an accident. Always The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
leave the system OFF when you are not using it. Uconnect system if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Set-
tings” in Multimedia” for more information. The speed
To Set A Desired Speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit
Turn the Speed Control ON. of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): 6
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed U.S. Speed (mph)
and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
button.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the button results in an increase of 1 mph.
SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected
continue to increase until the button is released, then
speed.
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h) U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h. button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established. the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed Metric Speed (km/h)
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
pushing the SET - button. decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
Uconnect system if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Set- • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
tings” in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed continue to decrease until the button is released, then
increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit the new set speed will be established.
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
To Accelerate For Passing ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the EQUIPPED
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
To Resume Speed
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above Speed Control function performs differently. Please
20 mph (32 km/h). refer to the proper section within this chapter.
To Deactivate ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in 6
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
vehicle will deactivate the Speed Control without erasing sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a
the set speed from memory. vehicle directly ahead of you.
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition NOTE:

switch OFF erases the set speed from memory. • If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
apply limited braking or accelerate (not to exceed the buttons. The two control modes function differently.
original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset Always confirm which mode is selected.
following distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead. WARNING!
The Cruise Control system has two control modes: • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an system. It is not a substitute for active driving
appropriate distance between vehicles. involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibil-
ity to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
• Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
Control Mode” in this section. conditions. Your complete attention is always re-
NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control quired while driving to maintain safe control of
will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
the mode selected. result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
(Continued)

• The ACC system: You should switch off the ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, • When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). in highway construction zones).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi- • When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
tions into account, and may be limited upon when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
adverse sight distance conditions. covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving slopes. 6
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing • When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
distance warnings. • When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while constant speed.
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle
for approximately 3 minutes in the stop position. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
If the target vehicle does not start moving within The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
3 minutes the parking brake will be activated, steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
and the ACC system will be cancelled.
(Continued)
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state,
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons Driver Information Display (DID) displays “ACC
1 — NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF Ready.”
2 — SET+/ACCEL
3 — RESUME When the system is OFF, the EVIC/DID displays “Adap-
4 — SET-/DECEL
5 — DISTANCE SETTING — INCREASE tive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
6 — ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF
7 — DISTANCE SETTING — DECREASE
8 — CANCEL
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is set.
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, RE-
VERSE or NEUTRAL.
• When the vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
6
• When the brakes are overheated.
• When the driver door is open.
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
To Activate/Deactivate Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this
time, the system will turn off and the EVIC/DID will
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
display “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the EVIC/DID
displays “ACC Ready.”
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed

When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET + button or the SET - button and release. The
EVIC/DID will display the set speed.
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to
20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be
WARNING! the current speed of the vehicle.
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
(Continued)
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do • The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
speed. If this occurs:
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• The message “ACC DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
in the EVIC/DID.
• Driver door is opened at low speeds.
• The system will not be controlling the distance be-
tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle To Turn Off
speed will only be determined by the position of the The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
accelerator pedal. memory if: 6
To Cancel
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button
The following conditions cancel the system: is pushed.
• The brake pedal is applied. • The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pushed.
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
• The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.
To Resume
WARNING!
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume)
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator The Resume function should only be used if traffic
pedal. The EVIC/DID will display the last set speed. and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
NOTE: road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
seconds, then the driver will either have to push the follow these warnings can result in a collision and
RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to death or serious personal injury.
reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle To Increase Speed
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET + button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
Uconnect Settings if equipped. Refer to “Uconnect Set- continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
tings” in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit in the EVIC/DID.
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): To Decrease Speed
U.S. Speed (mph) While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph pushing the SET - button.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
button results in an increase of 1 mph. Uconnect Settings if equipped. Refer to “Uconnect Set- 6
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will tings” in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
in the EVIC/DID. U.S. Speed (mph)
Metric Speed (km/h) • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re- sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
flected in the EVIC/DID. will automatically slow the vehicle.
Metric Speed (km/h) • The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after two
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
seconds the driver will either have to push the RES
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
(resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
flected in the EVIC/DID.
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
NOTE: may occur while climbing uphill or descending down-
hill. This is normal operation and necessary to main-
• When you override and push the SET + button or SET
tain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the
- buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed
ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature
of the vehicle.
exceeds normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the EVIC/DID.
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)

Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long) Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)

To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Set-
ting — Decrease button and release. Each time the button
is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the EVIC/DID displays the “Sensed Vehicle
Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed
automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless
of the set speed. 6
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:

Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting speed.
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer). • The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC/DID and a chime will
Brake Alert
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum
braking capacity. NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the EVIC/DID is a warn-
ing for the driver to take action and does not necessarily
mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is
applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid NOTE: After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a
standstill for approximately 3 consecutive minutes, the
When driving with ACC engaged and following a ve-
parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system will
hicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration
be cancelled.
up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle.
This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the
utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is opened,
passing on the left hand side. the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system
will be cancelled.
ACC Operation At Stop
In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to WARNING! 6
a standstill while following a target vehicle, if the target
vehicle starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
coming to a standstill, your vehicle will resume motion ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
without the need for any driver action. objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two serious personal injury.
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the driver
will either have to push the RES (resume) button, or
apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the
existing Set Speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will display in the EVIC/DID:
The EVIC/DID displays the current ACC system set-
tings. The EVIC/DID is located in the center of the ACC SET
instrument cluster. The information it displays depends
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
on ACC system status.
instrument cluster.
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
the following displays in the EVIC/DID:
• System Cancel
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
• Driver Override
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap-
tive Cruise Control Off.” • System Off
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready • ACC Proximity Warning
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has • ACC Unavailable Warning
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.” • The EVIC/DID will return to the last display selected
after five seconds of no ACC display activity
Display Warnings And Maintenance vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
this warning may temporarily occur.
Warning
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as section.
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should 6
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
dirt or ice. In these cases, the EVIC/DID will display
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and
vehicle behind the lower grille.
the system will deactivate.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor-
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
tant to note the following maintenance items:
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or • Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
the sensor lens.
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Ra-
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and dar Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
require a sensor realignment. once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
authorized dealer.
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will
malfunction. indicate when conditions temporarily limit system per-
formance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibil-
When the condition that deactivated the system is no ity, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive system may also become temporarily blinded due to
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield,
simply reactivating it. driving directly into the sun and fog on the inside of
glass. In these cases, the EVIC/DID will display “ACC/
FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and
the system will have degraded performance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas. other obstruction, have the windshield and forward
Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may
Service ACC/FCW Warning
temporarily occur.
If the system turns off, and the EVIC/DID displays
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/
examine the windshield and the camera located on the FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an 6
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction. limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still
When the condition that created limited functionality is drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be tempo-
no longer present, the system will return to full function- rarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
ality. later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists,
see your authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpect-
edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
Offset Driving Condition Example
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and Turns And Bends
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
brake or accelerate unexpectedly. may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once
the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume Using ACC On Hills
your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
system functionality. your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited. conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC perfor-
mance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example ACC Hill Example

Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be atten-
tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example

Narrow Vehicles Stationary Objects And Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicle Example

Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
General Information Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency Mode
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310. for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed)
Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate
1. The device may not cause harmful interference. the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be
operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op- To change between the different control modes, push the
eration of the device. ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button
which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed)
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pushing of the
other than an authorized service facility could void
NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CON-
authorization to use this equipment.
TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (chang-
ing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Con-
trol mode.
SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the
WARNING!
vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will has been set a message (CRUISE CONTROL SET TO
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity MPH/KM) will appear indicating what speed was set.
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound This light will turn on when the system is turned on via
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since the On/Off control. It turns green when the electronic
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the speed control is SET.
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is To Increase Speed 6
selected. When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Con-
trol is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET +
To Set A Desired Speed
button.
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic

Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
Uconnect Settings if equipped. Refer to “Uconnect Set- continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
tings” in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
increment shown is dependant on the speed of U.S. in the EVIC/DID display.
(mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
To Decrease Speed
U.S. Speed (mph)
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
Uconnect Settings if equipped. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will tings” in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the decrement shown is dependant on the speed of U.S.
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
in the EVIC/DID display.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • The brake pedal is applied.
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
flected in the EVIC/DID display. • The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the • The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h. heated).
6
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
To Resume Speed
flected in the EVIC/DID display. To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
To Cancel
20 mph (32 km/h).
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the
memory:
To Turn Off be automatically applied and released when performing
a reverse parking maneuver if the system detects a
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
possible collision with an obstacle.
memory if:
NOTE:
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pushed. • The driver can override the automatic braking func-
tion by pushing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off
• The ignition is turned off.
via ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is automatic brakes are being applied.
pushed.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF available.
EQUIPPED • Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
and audible indications of the distance between the rear Assist system or the Braking System Module.
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. • The automatic braking function may not provide
during a parking maneuver. If your vehicle is equipped
enough vehicle deceleration to avoid colliding with a
with an Automatic Transmission, the vehicle brakes may detected obstacle depending on vehicle speed, road
conditions, and brake capability.
• The automatic braking function may not be applied • The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
fast enough for moving obstacles that approach the substitute the driver.
rear of the vehicle from the left and / or right sides.
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
• The automatic braking function can be enabled/ acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features vehicle’s movements.
section of the Uconnect System.
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” for limi-
• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state tations of this system and recommendations.
for the automatic braking function through ignition
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
cycles. 6
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the changed to the ON/RUN position.
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected ob-
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
stacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
NOTE: position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
above. When in REVERSE and above the system’s oper-
vehicle.
ating speed, a warning will appear within the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information
Display (DID) indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
system will become active again if the vehicle speed is EVIC/DID. It provides visual warnings to indicate the
decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the de-
(9 km/h). tected obstacle. Refer to “Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/ ParkSense Display
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle has
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect been detected, the warning display will turn ON indicat-
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in ing the system status.
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
tion of the obstacle.
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
ParkSense Visual Alert If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer - region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System. vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
information. sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc

Slow Tone/Solid Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc

Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Greater than 79-59 in 59-47 in 47-39 in 39-25 in 25-12 in Less than
Distance 79 in (200-150 cm) (150-120 cm) (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 in
(in/cm) (200 cm) (30 cm)
Arcs — None None None None None 2nd 1st
Left Flashing Flashing
Arcs — None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd 2nd 1st
Center Flashing Flashing Flashing
Right Flashing Flashing
Audible None Single 1/2- Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Alert Second Tone (for rear (for rear (for rear
Chime (for rear center center only) center
center only) only) only)
Radio No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Volume
Reduced
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.
ParkSense Switch
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five sec-
onds. Refer to “Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is
disabled, the EVIC/DID will display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the
OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message. Refer to “Display” in “Getting To Know Your
The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is
Instrument Panel”” for further information. When the
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has
will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
detected a faulted condition, the EVIC/DID will display
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED
SORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
will be ON.
QUIRED⬙ message for five seconds while the vehicle is in
NOTE: When KeySense feature is present, the ParkSense REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense will not
System will reject customer input to turn the system OFF operate and will read “OFF” over the arcs.
via the hard switch. The EVIC/DID will display ⬙Key-
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-
Sense in Use Selected Feature Cannot be Disabled⬙ mes-
SORS” appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
sage.
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
message continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” • When you turn ParkSense OFF, the instrument cluster
appears in the EVIC/DID, see an authorized dealer. will display “PARKSENSE OFF” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it
Cleaning The ParkSense System
on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
position and ParkSense is turned OFF, the EVIC/DID
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
will display “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long
age the sensors.
as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the 6
NOTE: radio when it is sounding a tone.
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud, • Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
properly. covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
affect the performance of ParkSense.
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in
the open position.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
ParkSense.
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the WARNING!
EVIC/DID.
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
CAUTION! when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not You are responsible for safety and must continue to
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity. can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
(Continued)
up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver.
If your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Transmis-
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom- sion, the vehicle brakes may be automatically applied
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem- and released when performing a reverse parking maneu-
bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the ver if the system detects a possible collision with an
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can obstacle.
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the NOTE:
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker • The driver can override the automatic braking func-
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors tion by pushing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off 6
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem- via ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the
bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false automatic brakes are being applied.
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST — available.
IF EQUIPPED • Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
audible indications of the distance between the rear Assist system or the Braking System Module.
and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing
• The automatic braking function may not provide NOTE:
enough vehicle deceleration to avoid colliding with a
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
detected obstacle depending on vehicle speed, road
vehicle.
conditions, and brake capability.
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
• The automatic braking function may not be applied
substitute the driver.
fast enough for moving obstacles that approach the
rear of the vehicle from the left and / or right sides. • The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
• The automatic braking function can be enabled/
vehicle’s movements.
disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect System. Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” for limi-
tations of this system and recommendations.
• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
for the automatic braking function through ignition ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
cycles. disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected ob- ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
stacles when backing up in REVERSE gear. REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of
these gear selector positions, the system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to approxi- NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with the ParkSense
mately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE Active Park Assist system, six sensors will be located in
and above the system’s operating speed, a warning will the rear fascia/bumper. Refer to the ⬙ParkSense Active
appear in the EVIC/DID indicating the vehicle speed is Park Assist System⬙ section for further information.
too fast. The system will become active again if the The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/
vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approxi- bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
mately 6 mph (9 km/h). within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
ParkSense Sensors obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in
(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/ 6
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
tion of the obstacle.
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in ParkSense Visual Alert
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta- Sound and Display is selected from the Customer -
tion of the obstacle. Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.
Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
Information Display (DID). It provides visual warnings region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
Refer to “Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
Panel” for further information. If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
ParkSense Display region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
Rear Park Assist
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle has the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
been detected, the warning display will turn ON indicat- vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
ing the system status.
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc Slow Tone/Solid Arc

Slow Tone/Solid Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc

Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc

WARNING ALERTS
Rear Greater than 79-59 in 59-47 in 47-39 in 39-25 in 25-12 in Less than
Distance 79 in (200-150 cm) (150-120 cm) (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 in
(in/cm) (200 cm) (30 cm)
Left Flashing Flashing
Arcs — None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd 2nd 1st
Center Flashing Flashing Flashing
Right Flashing Flashing
Audible None Single 1/2- Slow Slow Fast Fast Continu-
Alert Second Tone (for rear (for rear (for rear ous
Chime (for rear center center center
center only) only) only) only)
Radio No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Volume
Reduced
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if left and/or right front region and will produce a fast
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone. sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
Front Park Assist the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
When the vehicle is in DRIVE the ParkSense Warning
screen will be displayed when an obstacle is detected.
6
If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the
display will show a single arc in the center front region.
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display
will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle. A
fast sound tone will be produced when reaching the 2nd
flashing arc and will change to a continuous sound tone
when the 1st flashing arc appears. No Tone/Solid Arc
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
No Tone/Flashing Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc

Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc

WARNING ALERTS
Front Distance Greater than 47-39 in 39-25 in 25-12 in Less than
(in/cm) 47 in (120 cm) (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 in (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert None None None Fast Continuous
Chime
Radio Volume No No No Yes Yes
Reduced
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone. Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul-
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
timedia” for further information.
(chime) after approximately three seconds when an ob-
stacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and If the Uconnect System is equipped, chime volume
brake pedal is applied. settings will not be accessible from the EVIC/DID.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.
6
ParkSense Switch
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five sec-
onds. Refer to “Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is
disabled, the EVIC/DID will display the “PARKSENSE SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. FRONT SENSORS⬙, or the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds.
The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is
When the gear selector is moved to Reverse and the
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
system has detected a faulted condition, the Electronic
will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
Display (DID) will display a ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED
ABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
will be ON.
ABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UN-
NOTE: When KeySense feature is present, the ParkSense AVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ pop up message for
System will reject customer input to turn the system OFF five seconds. After five seconds, a car graphic will be
via the hard switch. The EVIC/DID will display ⬙Key- displayed with ⬙OFF⬙ at either the front or rear sensor
Sense in Use Selected Feature Cannot be Disabled⬙ mes- location depending on where the fault is detected. The
sage. system will continue to provide arc alerts for the side that
is functioning properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙,
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will SORS⬙, or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will QUIRED⬙ messages if an object is detected within the five
display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
second pop-up duration. The car graphic will remain Cleaning The ParkSense System
displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
to “Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
Panel” for further information. scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ age the sensors.
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
SORS⬙ appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make NOTE:
sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow, 6
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system
clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then
operating properly.
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see
an authorized dealer. • Construction equipment, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of ParkSense.
If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
QUIRED⬙ message appears in the EVIC/DID, see an • When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
authorized dealer. will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it
on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for five sec- causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
onds while the vehicle is in REVERSE. REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone. • ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in
the open position.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be • There may be a delay in the object detection rate if the
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. object is moving. This may cause the automatic brak-
Failure to do so can result in the system not working ing application to be delayed.
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the appropriate fascia/ CAUTION!
bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind or in front of the appropriate • ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
fascia/bumper. recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.
are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/ (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

the sensors will not be detected when they are in pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
close proximity. can result in serious injury or death.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using • Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
ParkSense. result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the 6
WARNING! obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
(Continued)
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — • The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
IF EQUIPPED substitute the driver.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended to • During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver
assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular park- touches the steering wheel after being instructed to
ing maneuvers by identifying a proper parking space, remove their hands from the steering wheel, the sys-
providing audible/visual instructions, and controlling tem will cancel, and the driver will be required to
the steering wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist manually complete the parking maneuver.
system is defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver
• The system may not work in all conditions (e.g.
maintains control of the accelerator, gear selector and
environmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow,
brakes. Depending on the driver’s parking maneuver
etc., or if searching for a parking space that has
selection, the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
surfaces that will absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
capable of maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a
perpendicular parking space on either side (i.e., driver • New vehicles from the dealership must have at least 30
side or passenger side). miles (48 km) accumulated before the ParkSense Ac-
tive Park Assist system is fully calibrated and performs
NOTE:
accurately. This is due to the system’s dynamic vehicle
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the calibration to improve the performance of the feature.
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and
must intervene as required.
The system will also continuously perform the dy-
namic vehicle calibration to account for differences
such as over or under inflated tires and new tires.
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active
Park Assist System
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can be enabled
and disabled with the ParkSense Active Park Assist
switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect
display. 6
ParkSense Active Park Assist Switch

To enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch once (LED turns on).
To disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch again (LED turns off).
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off • The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
automatically for any of the following conditions: maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE.
If the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,
• The parking maneuver is completed.
the system will cancel and the DID will instruct the
• Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) when driver to complete the maneuver manually.
searching for a parking space.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only oper-
• Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during ate and search for a parking space when the following
active steering guidance into the parking space. conditions are present:
• Touching the steering wheel during active steering • The gear position is in DRIVE.
guidance into the parking space.
• The ignition is in the RUN position.
• Pushing the ParkSense Front and Rear Park Assist
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated.
switch.
• The Driver’s door is closed.
• The Driver’s door is opened.
• The liftgate is closed.
• The liftgate is opened.
• Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
• Electronic Stability Control/Anti-lock Braking System
intervention.
NOTE: If the vehicle is driven above approximately Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/
15 mph (25 km/h), the DID will instruct the driver to Display
slow down. If the vehicle is driven above approximately When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled
18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel. The driver the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK for Perpen-
must then reactivate the system by pushing the dicular Park” message will appear in the Driver Informa-
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch. tion Display (DID). You may switch to perpendicular
• The outer surface and the underside of the front and parking if you desire. Push the OK button on the left side
rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice, steering wheel switch to change your parking space
mud, dirt or other obstruction. setting.
6
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park NOTE:
Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn
will turn OFF if any of the above conditions are not
signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you
present.
want to perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense
Active Park Assist system will automatically search for
a parking space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle
if the turn signal is not activated.
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear
of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protrud-
ing into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
from surrounding objects/vehicles).
• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
Active ParkSense Searching
• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
When an available parking space has been found, and the
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
forward to position the vehicle for a parallel parking
parking space for the maneuver).
sequence.
Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward Parking Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to Wheel
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands
from the steering wheel. removed from the steering wheel, you will be instructed
to place the gear selector into the REVERSE position.
Parking Space Found — Shift To Reverse Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
When the driver places the gear selector into the RE- The system will then instruct the driver to check their
VERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to surroundings and move backward.
wait for steering to complete.
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE or REVERSE. If
the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,
driver to complete the maneuver manually.
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle 6
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering
guidance into the parking space. The system will
Check Surroundings — Move Backward provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
NOTE: tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible
for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
• It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneu- • If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
ver. reason, the driver must take full control of the vehicle.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement. surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is re-
quired.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the gear selector into the
DRIVE position.
Check Surroundings — STOP

Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
When the driver places the gear selector into the DRIVE The system will then instruct the driver to check their
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for surroundings and move forward.
steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Move Forward Check Surroundings — STOP

When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake
quired.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver When the driver places the gear selector into the RE-
will be instructed to place the gear selector into the VERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to
REVERSE position. wait for steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
The system will then instruct the driver to check their check the vehicle’s parking position. If the driver is
surroundings and move backward. satisfied with the vehicle position, they should shift to
PARK. The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking
Position⬙ message will be momentarily displayed.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward

Your vehicle is now in the parallel park position. When
the maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is en-
abled, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK for
Perpendicular Park” message will show in the DID
display. Push the OK button on the left side steering
wheel switch to change your parking space setting to a
perpendicular maneuver. You may switch back to paral-
lel parking if you desire.
6
Once the driver pushes OK for a perpendicular parking
maneuver, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK
for Parallel Park” message will appear in the DID display. Active ParkSense Searching Display
NOTE: • When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you
want to perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense • The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
Active Park Assist system will automatically search for space (example: if passing multiple available parking
a parking space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
if the turn signal is not activated. parking space for the maneuver).
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected When an available parking space has been found, and the
parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.). forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular
parking sequence.
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protrud-
ing into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
from surrounding objects/vehicles).
Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward Parking Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to Wheel
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands
from the steering wheel. removed from the steering wheel, you will be instructed
to place the gear selector into the REVERSE position.
Parking Space Found — Shift To Reverse Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
When the driver places the gear selector into the RE- The system will then instruct the driver to check their
VERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to surroundings and move backward.
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE or REVERSE. If
the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,
driver to complete the maneuver manually.
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle 6
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering
guidance into the parking space. The system will
Check Surroundings — Move Backwards provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
NOTE: tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible
for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
• It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneu- • If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
ver. reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake
quired.
DRIVE position.
Check Surroundings — STOP

Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
When the driver places the gear selector into the DRIVE The system will then instruct the driver to check their
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for surroundings and move forward.
steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Move Forward Check Surroundings — STOP

When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake
quired.
REVERSE position.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete

The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
When the driver places the gear selector into the RE-
VERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to
Check Surroundings — Move Backwards Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular park position.
When the maneuver is complete, the driver will be in-
structed to check the vehicle’s parking position. If the
driver is satisfied with the vehicle position, they should
shift to PARK. The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check
Parking Position⬙ message will be momentarily displayed.
CAUTION! WARNING!
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a Drivers must be careful when performing parallel or
parking aid and it is unable to recognize every perpendicular parking maneuvers even when using
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs the ParkSense Active Park Assist system. Always
might be temporarily detected or not detected at check carefully behind and in front of your vehicle,
all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors look behind and in front of you, and be sure to check
will not be detected when they are in close prox- for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
imity. and blind spots before backing up and moving
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the forward. You are responsible for safety and must 6
ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Fail-
able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It ure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
is recommended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using the ParkSense Active Park LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
Assist system.
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). It
uses a forward looking camera to detect lane markings turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a
and measure vehicle position within the lane boundaries. visual warning through the DID to prompt the driver to
remain within the lane. When only a single lane marking
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be pro-
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
vided.
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warn-
ing in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are
If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the on the steering wheel and provides an audible warning
lane, the LaneSense system provides a visual warning to the driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on
through the Driver Information Display (DID) to prompt the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver
the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. does not return their hands to the wheel.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the
driver unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no
Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF To turn the LaneSense system ON, push the LaneSense
The default status of LaneSense is “OFF”. button to turn the system ON (LED turns off). A “Lane
Sense On” message is shown in the DID.
The LaneSense button is located on the switch panel
below the Uconnect display.
Lane Sense On Message

To turn the LaneSense system OFF, push the LaneSense
LaneSense Button button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state ON or OFF from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the Driver Information Display (DID).
7.0 DID Screen
When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense indicator is solid white.
System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense
indicator is solid white when only the left lane mark-
ing has been detected and the system is ready to
provide visual warnings in the DID if an unintentional
lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin lane marking has been detected.
line remains solid yellow and the LaneSense indicator
Left Lane Departure — Both Lane Lines Detected
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator
is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual 6
warnings in the DID and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid

Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)

• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situa-
tion, the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow
yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from solid Thin Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)
green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to
the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left
thin line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
6
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid

Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
Changing LaneSense Status PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity EQUIPPED
of the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
(Early/Medium/Late) that you can configure through Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
the Uconnect system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
in “Multimedia” for further information. the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the touchscreen display along with a cau-
NOTE:
tion note “Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of
• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle
above the rear license plate.
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has pro-
• The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
grammable modes of operation that may be selected
whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes,
through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
traction control system, electronic stability control,
tings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
forward collision warning, etc.).
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
REVERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition
is switched to the OFF position.
A touch screen button to disable display of the camera
image is made available when the vehicle is not in
REVERSE gear. Display of the camera image after shift-
ing out of REVERSE can be disabled via a touch screen
button personalization entry in the camera settings
6
menu.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
ParkView Camera Location image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera projected backup path based on the steering wheel
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and position.
the navigation or audio screen appears again.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera the vehicle.
delay turned ON), the camera image will continue to be
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle

Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens. • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
CAUTION! stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/her
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be shoulder when using ParkView.
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)
view is selected through the ⬙on screen soft buttons⬙. The
WARNING!
top view of the vehicle will show which doors are open.
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when The image will be displayed on the touchscreen display
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always along with a caution note; “Check Entire Surroundings”
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob- will disappear. The Surround View Camera System is
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are comprised of 4 sequential cameras located in the front
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and grille, rear liftgate and side mirrors.
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
NOTE: The Surround View Camera System has pro-
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. 6
grammable settings that may be selected through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul-
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — IF timedia” for further information.
EQUIPPED
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the rear
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround View
camera view & top view is the default view of the system.
Camera System that allows you to see an on-screen image
of the surroundings and top view of your vehicle when- When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
ever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or a different delay turned ON), the camera image will continue to be
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
REVERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition image to illustrate the width of the vehicle, including the
is switched to the OFF position. side view mirrors and its projected backup path based on
the steering wheel position.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the surround view camera mode is Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
exited and the last known screen appears again. There is the vehicle.
a touch screen button (X) to disable the display of the
camera image.
The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle

Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
Modes of Operation
Additional camera modes can be selected when the
vehicle is in any gear and the surround view camera
system is activated by pressing the soft key located in the
“Controls” screen or the “Apps” screen in the Uconnect
system.
Top View
The Top view will show in the Uconnect System with
6
Rear View and Front View in a split view display. There
is integrated ParkSense arcs in the image at the front and
rear of the vehicle. The arcs will change color from yellow ParkSense Arcs
to red corresponding the distance zones to the oncoming
NOTE:
object.
• Front tires will be in image when the tires are turned.
• Due to wide angle cameras in mirror, the image will
appear distorted.
• Top view will show which sliding doors are open.
• Open Front doors will remove outside image. Front View
Rear View The Front view will show you what is
This is the Default view of the system immediately in front of the vehicle and
in REVERSE and is always paired with is always paired with the Top view of
the Top view of the vehicle with op- the vehicle.
tional active guide lines for the pro-
jected path when enabled.
Front Cross Path View
Rear Cross Path View Pressing the Front Cross Path soft key
Pressing the Rear Cross Path soft key will give the driver a wider angle view
will give the driver a wider angle view of the front camera system. The Top
of the rear camera system. The Top view will be disabled when this is
view will be disabled when this is selected.
selected.
Deactivation • If a malfunction with the system has occurred, see
your nearest authorized dealer.
The system can be deactivated in the following condi-
tions:
CAUTION!
• The speed of the vehicle reaches greater than 8 mph
(13 km/h). • To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View should
only be used as a parking aid. The Surround View
• The vehicle is out of REVERSE for greater than 10 camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in
seconds. your drive path.
• Shift the vehicle into PARK from a different gear. • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be 6
driven slowly when using Surround View to be
• Press the “X” button if the vehicle is in any gear. able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
NOTE: recommended that the driver look frequently over
his/her shoulder when using Surround View.
• If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up
on the camera lenses, clean the lenses, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the
lenses.
WARNING! WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
using the Surround View Camera. Always check vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check being filled.
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, • Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
for the safety of your surroundings and must con- tions and may cause the MIL to turn on.
tinue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do • A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
so can result in serious injury or death. portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
REFUELING THE VEHICLE the ground while filling.
There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the pipe
seals the system. CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
filler cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities
(Continued)
into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermar-
ket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping
from the system.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the MIL to
turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. 6
1. Put the vehicle in park and switch the ignition off.
2. Push the center-rear edge of the fuel filler door Fuel Filler Cap Release
(3 o’clock position) and release to open. 3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe, the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refuel-
ing.
4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
5. After you have stopped pumping fuel, remove the fuel This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
filler nozzle. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
6. To close the fuel filler door, push the center-rear edge
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
(3 o’clock position) of the fuel filler door and then
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
release. The fuel filler door will latch closed.
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
NOTE: bottom of the label is your VIN.
• In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
filler door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
the fuel filler door around the perimeter to break the including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
ice build up. The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
VEHICLE LOADING rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Certification Label
Payload
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar. weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) Inflation Pressure
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Curb Weight
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
components sometimes specified by purchasers for in- loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi- values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a 6
cle’s GVWR. commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
Tire Size added.
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents Loading
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
Rim Size by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
listed. cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weigh- parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted your vehicle.
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier TRAILER TOWING
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed In this section you will find safety tips and information
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving. on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way review this information to tow your load as efficiently
the brakes operate. and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
CAUTION! follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
(Continued)
Common Towing Definitions The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further 6
further information. information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) WARNING!

The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem- front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
ready for operation⬙ condition. control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW) If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
Trailer Sway Control of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and trailers.
the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable fric-
tion associated with the telescoping motion to dampen
any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
WARNING!
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used • An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the system may reduce handling, stability, braking
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used performance, and could result in a collision.
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro- • Weight Distributing Systems may not be compat-
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent ible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec-
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control reational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and 6
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
Trailer Hitch Classification tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
The following chart provides the industry standard for correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4 535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
GCWR (Gross Max. GTW

Engine/ Trailer Tow Max. Tongue
Combined Frontal Area (Gross Trailer
Transmission Package Weight
Weight Rating) Weight)
3.6L/Automatic Yes 8,600 lbs 40 sq ft 3,600 lbs 360 lbs (163 kg)
(3 900 kg) (3.72 sq m) (1 632 kg)*
No 6,500 lbs 40 sq ft 1500 lbs 149 lbs (67 kg) 6
(2 948 kg) (3.72 sq m) (680 kg)*
* For vehicles equipped with Fold-in-Floor seating, the Gross Trailer Weight must be reduced by 100 lbs (45 kg).
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tires” in
“Maintaining And Caring For Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Vehicle Loading Chart EXAMPLE:
Follow these steps to determine the total weight the • GVWR = 6005 lbs (2723 kg)
vehicle can carry.
• CURB = 4500 lbs (2041 kg)
1. Determine the cargo capacity of your vehicle.
• Load Capacity = GVWR – CURB = 6005 lbs (2723 kg)
• Load Capacity = GVWR – Curb (weight of vehicle - 4500 lbs (2041 kg) = 1505 lbs (682 kg)
full fluids NO Occupants).
4 Occupants (at 150 lbs [68 kg]) + Max Trailer =
2. Determine occupant count.
• For calculation purposes, average weight of an occu- • 1505 lbs (682 kg) – 600 lbs (272 kg) (4 x 150 lbs [68 kg])
pant is 150 lb (68 kg). – 360 lbs (163 kg) (10% of 3600 lbs [1632 kg]) = 545 lbs
(247 kg) of cargo in vehicle
Number Of Persons / Weight Of Occupants Max Cargo No Tongue Load, Max Cargo
Trailer Max Trailer With Max
Trailer 360 lb
(136 kg) Tongue
Load
1205 lbs
(546 kg) –
360 lbs (136 kg)
1205 lbs (546 kg) = 845 lbs 845 lbs (383 kg)
2 People / 300 lbs (136) kg
(383 kg) 6
955 lbs (433 kg)
– 360 lbs
(136 kg) =
4 people / 600 lbs (272 kg) 955 lbs (433 kg) 545 lbs (247 kg) 545 lbs (247 kg)
455 lbs (206 kg)
– 360 lbs
(163 kg) =
455 lbs (206 kg) 95 lbs (43 kg) 95 lbs (43 kg)
7 people / 1050 lbs (476 kg)
• Make sure loading does not exceed GAWR of front or Consider the following items when computing the
rear axles. weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• GAWR are found on sticker in Drier Side Door Jam. • The tongue weight of the trailer.
Trailer And Tongue Weight • The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch. • The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements And Caring For Your Vehicle” for the proper mainte-
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive- nance intervals. When towing a trailer, never exceed the
train components, the following guidelines are recom- GAWR or GCWR ratings.
mended.
WARNING!
CAUTION! Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle possible:
or other parts could be damaged. • Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer 6
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a and will not shift during travel. When trailering
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
the heavier loads. have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Scheduled Servic- overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
ing”. Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in “Maintaining
(Continued)

cause a loss of control, poor performance or dam- • Total weight must be distributed between the tow
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
suspension, chassis structure or tires. ratings are not exceeded:
• Safety chains must always be used between your
1. GVWR
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the 2. GTW
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough 3. GAWR
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a 4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti-
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on lized.
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
Towing Requirements — Tires
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, • Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels. spare tire.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
(Continued)
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
“Tires” in “Maintaining And Caring For Your Vehicle” vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
for proper tire inflation procedures. This could cause inadequate braking and possible
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres- personal injury.
sures before trailer usage. • An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage required when towing a trailer with electronically
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires” in “Maintain- actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
ing And Caring For Your Vehicle” for the proper a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic 6
inspection procedure. brake controller is not required.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in “Maintaining • Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
And Caring For Your Vehicle” for the proper tire 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued)

• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
system and cause it to fail. You might not have Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision. Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
distance. When towing you should allow for addi- motoring safety.
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
collision. ness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
CAUTION!
wiring harness.
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg) The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this Refer to the following illustrations.
(Continued)
Four-Pin Connector Seven-Pin Connector

1 — Female Pins 4 — Park 1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn 2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn 3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
Towing Tips Cooling System
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heating, take the following actions:
heavy traffic.
City Driving
Automatic Transmission
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shift-
ing when towing. For increased engine braking on steep Highway Driving
downhill grades, select the LOW range. Reduce speed.
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped Air Conditioning
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads. Turn off temporarily.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheel OFF the Ground All Models

Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
6
NOTE: • When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable
state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
Highway Safety offices for additional details.
disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadver-
tent Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park • If your vehicle is disabled and in need of commercial
Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer towing service, please refer to “Towing A Disabled
programmable features in the Uconnect Settings. Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency”.
Recreational Towing — All Models 7. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, but do not
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain start the engine.
will result. 8. Press and hold the brake pedal.
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels 9. Release the parking brake.
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a
tow dolly (front wheels off the ground) or vehicle trailer 10. Turn the ignition OFF.
(all four wheels off the ground). If using a tow dolly, 11. Release the brake pedal.
follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following CAUTION!
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions. • DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly. drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires tow-
ing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF the
3. Apply the parking brake. ground.
4. Place the transmission in PARK. • Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
5. Turn the engine OFF.
6. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following (Continued)
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING!

• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re- Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
quirements can cause severe transmission damage. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
Damage from improper towing is not covered un- front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
DRIVING TIPS (ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Driving On Slippery Surfaces
Traction 6
Information in this section will aid in safe controlled
launches in adverse conditions. When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
Acceleration surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip- complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs be observed:
when there is a difference in the surface traction under 1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
the front (driving) wheels. slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. Flowing/Rising Water
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
WARNING!
4. Keep tires properly inflated. Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
sudden stop. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
Driving Through Water your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
Driving through water more than a few inches/ fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Shallow Standing Water
CAUTION!
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions • Always check the depth of the standing water
and Warnings before doing so. before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
WARNING! the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi- that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph the way before driving through the standing water.
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water. • Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving 6
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi- through standing water. This will minimize wave
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping effects.
distances. Therefore, after driving through stand- • Driving through standing water may cause damage
ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes. inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans-
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas- fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
sengers, and others around you. driving through standing water. Do not continue to
(Continued)
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami-
nated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .529 ▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
䡵 ASSIST AND 9–1–1 REARVIEW MIRROR — IF 䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537 ▫ Jack And Spare Tire Location . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
▫ Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537 ▫ Equipment Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560 7
▫ Replacing Exterior Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 ▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546 ▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 ▫ Portable Air Compressor — If Equipped . . . . .571
▫ Fuse Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548 ▫ Tire Service Kit For Inflating Tire — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
▫ Underhood Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
528 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579 䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
▫ Return Inflatable Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582 䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .582 䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .605
䡵 JUMP-STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595 䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . .609
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
䡵 REFUELLING IN EMERGENCY . . . . . . . . . . . .599
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .600
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 529
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ASSIST AND 9–1–1 REARVIEW MIRROR — IF
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the EQUIPPED
lower center area of the instrument panel. A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is dis-
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your 7
abled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
view viewing.
other motorists.
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
On or Off using the Mirror Dimming Button on the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
mirror.
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• The 9–1–1 and ASSIST buttons will only function if
Assist And 9–1–1 Mirror you are connected to an operable 1X (voice/data) or
1 — 9-1-1 Button
3G (data) network. Other Uconnect services will only
2 — Mirror Dimming Button be operable if your Uconnect Access service is active
3 — ASSIST Button and you are connected to an operable 1X (voice/data)
or 3G (data) network.
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and
a 9-1-1 button.
ASSIST Call 9-1-1 Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you 1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
to any one of the following support centers:
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
tow, just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be con- system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
nected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance 9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location. Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance. Device Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn the
green LED light on the Rearview Mirror off.
• Uconnect Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access Via Mobile 2. The LED light located between the Power and 9-1-1 7
features. buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1 NOTE:
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit • Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1 by the subscriber.
operator:
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1
• The vehicle brand. operator may be able to open a voice connection with
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle. the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed.
Once the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator with the vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if should be able to speak with you or other vehicle
additional help is needed. occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle.
The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to re-
WARNING! main connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the
9-1-1 operator terminates the connection.
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1 5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X emergency responders and provide them with impor-
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection. tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates.

• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical sys-
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions tem. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
or location), do not wait for voice contact from a signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle ference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
immediately and move to a safe location. never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G(data) network and vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
GPS antennas. You could prevent operable 1X on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BAT-
(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal TERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE 7
placing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/ UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,
data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal recep- AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
tion is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function • Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
properly. could cause the air bag system to fail when you
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehi- need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
cle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket is not there to help protect you.
(Continued)
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
WARNING!
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities. • Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls. dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the • The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
following may occur at the time the malfunction is the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle: if a malfunction in any part of the system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illumi-
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST nated, have an authorized dealer service the Occu-
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated pant Restraint Control system immediately.
red.
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors
• The Device Screen will display the following message beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your 9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not
dealer.” limited to, the following factors:
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle de- • The ignition is in OFF position.
vice requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
WARNING!
• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon- and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
nected during a vehicle crash. (voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
• 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network and/or Global NOTE:
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or ob-
structed. • Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s 1X 7
• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator. (voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
• 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network congestion. prevent 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from plac-
• Weather conditions. ing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/data) or
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels. 3G (data) network connection and a GPS signal is
required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
General Information
CAUTION!
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
this device must accept any interference received, includ-
mirror clean.
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Center & Rear Dome Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Center & Rear Reading Lamps LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Door Courtesy Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Header Reading Lamps – If Equipped LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Instrument Cluster Lamps LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) 7
Liftgate Lamp(s) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Overhead Console Reading Lamps LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Removable Console Lamp – If Equipped LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Visor Vanity Lamps 6501966
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
High Intensity Discharge Headlamp Low Beam - D3S
High Beam - 9005LL
Halogen Headlamp Reflector Low Beam - H11LL
Projector Halogen Low Beam - 9005HL+
All High Beams - 9005LL
Dedicated Daytime Running Lamp (If Equipped) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Turn Signal Lamp PWY24WNA (If Halogen Headlamp Equipped)
PWY24WSV (If HID Headlamp Equipped)
Side Marker Lamp W3W
Front Park Lamp PWY24WNA (If Bulb Equipped)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamp H11LL
LED Front Fog Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Center High Mounted Stop (CHMSL) Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Stop/Turn Signal Lamp W21/5WLL
Lamps Bulb Number

Rear Tail/Side Marker Lamp Rear Tail - Body Side - W21/5WLL (If Bulb
Equipped); LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Tail - Liftgate - W5WLL (If Bulb Equipped); LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Side Marker: W3W
Backup Lamp W21W
License Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Replacing Exterior Bulbs NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to 7
Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge (HID)
the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
Headlamps — If Equipped
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
The headlamps contain a type of high voltage discharge
light source. High voltage can remain in the circuit even WARNING!
with the headlamp switch off. Because of this, you should
not attempt to service a HID headlamp light source A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
yourself. If an HID headlamp light source fails, take your HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
(Continued)
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electro-
cution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
Bi-Halogen Headlamps
1. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the
headlamp bulb cap.
2. Firmly grasp the headlamp bulb cap and rotate it
counterclockwise to unlock it.
Headlamp Bulb Cap
3. Firmly grasp the headlamp bulb socket assembly and
rotate counterclockwise to remove from the housing.
7
Headlamp Bulb Socket Headlamp Bulb
4. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector and
CAUTION!
then connect the replacement bulb.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
5. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
headlamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock it in
place.
6. Install the headlamp bulb cap in the headlamp hous-
ing and rotate clockwise to lock it in place.
Front Turn Signal Lamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Twist the front turn signal lamp socket assembly
counterclockwise, and then remove the front turn
signal lamp assembly from the lamp housing.
Front Turn Signal Lamp Socket
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace-
ment bulb.
4. Install the front turn signal lamp socket assembly into
the housing, and rotate the front turn signal lamp
socket clockwise to lock it in place.
Front And Rear Side Marker Lamps 2. Firmly grasp the front side marker lamp socket and
rotate 1/4 turn counterclockwise to remove it from the
1. Remove the three fasteners from the inner wheel liner
lamp assembly.
and carefully peel back liner for access.
Front Side Marker Lamp Bulb Removal

Inner Wheel Liner Fasteners
3. Remove bulb from the front side marker lamp socket
and replace with a new bulb.
4. Install front side marker lamp socket in lamp assembly
and rotate 1/4 turn clockwise to lock into place.
5. Position the inner wheel liner in place and install the
three fasteners.
Front Fog Lamp — Halogen
1. Remove fasteners from inner wheel liner and carefully
peel back liner for access.
2. Reach through the front fascia to fog lamp housing to
access the bulb.
3. Rotate the front fog lamp socket counterclockwise, Front Fog Lamp Socket
and remove the bulb and socket assembly from the
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace-
front fog lamp housing.
ment bulb.
3. Back-up lamps/tail lamp (if bulb equipped) are now
CAUTION!
visible. Rotate socket(s) counter clockwise.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil 4. Remove/replace bulb(s).
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the 5. Reinstall the socket(s)
bulb with rubbing alcohol. 6. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.
5. Install the front fog lamp socket assembly into the into Rear Bodyside Mounted Taillamps
the front fog lamp housing, and rotate the connector
clockwise to lock it in place. 1. Raise the liftgate.
6. Position the inner wheel liner in place and install 2. Remove two torx head screws on bodyside lamp using 7
fasteners. a T30 screwdriver.
Rear Liftgate Mounted Back-Up Lamps And Tail 3. Remove lamp from vehicle body and locate bulb
Lamps (If Bulb Equipped) socket on rear of lamp. Rotate socket counter-
clockwise.
1. Raise the liftgate.
4. Remove/replace bulb(s).
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry off
the bulb access cover on the lower liftgate trim. 5. Reinstall the socket(s)
6. Reverse process to reinstall the lamp onto vehicle.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
The center high-mounted stop lamp is an LED assembly. material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
See your authorized dealer for replacement. serious personal injury, fire and/or property dam-
age.
Rear License Lamp • Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
The rear license lamps are LED. See your authorized is off and that all the other services are switched off
dealer for replacement. and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
FUSES rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
WARNING! bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an ap-
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
propriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
(Continued)
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive
current.
When a device does not work you must check the
electrical circuit inside the fuse for a break/melt.
Also please be aware that when using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result
in vehicle battery discharge.
7
Blade Fuses
1 — Electrical Circuit
2 — Blade Fuse With Good Electrical Circuit
3 — Blade Fuse With Bad Electrical Circuit
Fuse Location
The fuses are grouped into four controllers located in the
engine compartment and under the instrument panel.
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains car-
tridge fuses, mini-fuses, micro-fuses, circuit breakers and
relays. A label that identifies each component is printed
on the inside of the cover.
Power Distribution Center

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F06 – – Not Used
F07 – 25 Amp Clear Ignition Coil/Fuel Injector
F09 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier/ANC

F12 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor (IBS)
F14 – 10 Amp Red ECM
F15 40 Amp Green – Power Locks
F16 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM
F17 30 Amp Pink – Starter
F18 40 Amp Green – CBC Feed #4 (Exterior 7
Lights #1)
F19 25 Amp Clear – 2nd Row Folding Seats
Solenoid LT
F20 – 10 Amp Red A/C Compressor Clutch
F21 25 Amp Clear – 2nd Row Folding Seat
Solenoid RT

F23 – – Not used
F24 – 20 Amp Yellow RR Wiper
F25B – 10 Amp Red LT RR Door/RT RR Re-
lease Module/Active Grill
Shutter/Power Mirror
F26 40 Amp Green – Front HVAC Blower Mo-
tor
F27 25 Amp Clear – RR Slide Door Module
F28 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port/ USB
Port/ AUX Port/ Video
USB Port
F30 – 15 Amp Blue Media Hub 1, 2/ Power
Lumbar

F32 20 Amp Blue – ECM
F33 30 Amp Pink – Power Liftgate Module
F34 25 Amp Clear – RR Door Node
F35 25 Amp Clear – Sunroof Control Module
F37 40 Amp Green – CBC Feed #4 (Exterior
Lighting #2)
F38 60 Amp Yellow – Vacuum Cleaner
F39 25 Amp Clear – HVAC Blower Motor 7
F42 30 Amp Pink – Folding Seat Module
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor
F44 30 Amp Pink – CBC Feed #1 (Interior
Lights)

F45 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter
F46 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module
F47 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module
F49 25 Amp Clear – RR Sliding Door Module
F50 25 Amp Clear – RR Door Module
F51 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper
F52 30 Amp Pink – Brake Vacuum Pump
F54 40 Amp Green – ESP-ECU And Valves
F55 – 15 Amp Blue Keyless Ignition System/
DVD/Voice Recognition
Module

F56 – 10 Amp Red Front and Rear HVAC
Control Module/ESP/
ESC
F59 30 Amp Pink – 7 Way Connector Recep-
tacle — If Equipped
F60 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Cargo APO
F61 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Stop/ 7
Turn — If Equipped
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Left Stop/
Turn — If Equipped
F64 – 15 Amp Blue RT HID Headlamp

F66 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster
(IPC)
F67 – 10 Amp Red In Vehicle Temperature
Sensor/Humidity Sensor/
Drivers Assist System
Module (DASM)/Park
Assist (PAM) – If
Equipped
F71 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F72 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors – If
Equipped
F73 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster (EBL)
F74 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup

F75 – 5 Amp Tan Overhead Console / RR
ISC
F76 – 20 Amp Yellow Uconnect/DCSD/
Telematics
F77 – 10 Amp Red RR Entertainment Screen
1 And 2/ Media Screen 1
And 2/ 3rd Row Row
USB Charge Only/ 2nd
Row YSB Charge Only/
Sunroof/Rainsensor/ 7
CRVMM/
F78 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Cluster/E-
Shifter
F79 – 10 Amp Red ICS/Front And Rear
HVAC/ SCCM/ EPB

F83 20 Amp Blue – TT Park Lights — If
Equipped
F84 40 Amp Green – ESP Motor Pump
F85 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F88 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seats
F89 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seats
F91 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Ventilated Seats/
Heated Steering Wheel

F95 – 10 Amp Red USB Charge Only Port
F96 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC) (Airbag)
F97 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC) (Airbag)
F98 – 15 Amp Blue Left HID Headlamp
F99 30 Amp Pink – Electrical Brake Module/
Trailer Tow — If 7
Equipped
F100 – 10 Amp Red AHLM/Rear Camera/
LBSS/RBSS/CVPM/
Humidity Sensor/In Ve-
hicle Temperature Sensor
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located in the passenger compartment on the left side dash panel under the instrument
panel.
Cavity Blade Fuse Description

F13 15 Amp Blue Low Beam Left
F32 10 Amp Red Interior Lighting
F36 10 Amp Red Intrusion Module / Siren
F37 7.5 Amp Brown Aux. Switch Bank Module (ASBM)
F38 20 Amp Yellow All Doors Lock/Unlock
F43 20 Amp Yellow Washer Pump Front
F48 20 Amp Yellow Horns
F49 7.5 Amp Brown Lumbar Support
F51 10 Amp Red Driver Window Switch / Power Mirrors – If
Equipped
F53 7.5 Amp Brown UCI Port (USB & AUX)
F89 5 Amp Tan Trunk Lamp
Cavity Blade Fuse Description

F91 5 Amp Tan Fog Lamp Front Left
F92 5 Amp Tan Fog Lamp Front Right
F93 10 Amp Red Low Beam Right
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING! • Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center 7
operating the jack or changing the wheel. where it can be raised on a lift.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
(Continued) changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack And Spare Tire Location Equipment Removal
The jacking tools, spare tire and portable air compressor 1. Remove the access panel to the jacking equipment.
(if equipped) or tire service kit (if equipped)are stowed
2. Unlatch the Portable Air Compressor or Tire Service
behind a access panel on left hand side of the vehicle.
Kit if equipped. Unscrew the wing nut that is holding
the Inflatable Spare Tire and gently remove it from the
storage area. Remove wrench from foam tray.
Jacking Equipment Location

3. Remove Jack by turning the jack screw counterclock-
wise to collapse from storage area that is located
behind the tire.
7
Jacking Equipment
1 — Inflatable Spare Tire
2 — Tire Service Kit
3 — Wrench Jack Location
4 — Fuel Filler Funnel
1 — Jack Screw
2 — Jack
Preparations For Jacking 6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if chang-
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
ing the right front tire, block the left rear wheel.
slippery areas.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the
WARNING! vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack Jacking Instructions
or changing the wheel.
WARNING!
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
3. Set the parking brake. help prevent personal injury or damage to your
4. Place the gear selector into PARK. vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
5. Turn OFF the ignition. edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
(Continued)
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set the transmis-
sion in PARK. Jack Warning Label
• Do not let any passenger sit in the vehicle when it CAUTION!
is on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
service center where it can be raised on a lift. Instructions for this vehicle. 7
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change. NOTE: Refer to the “Spare Tire” section of “Tires” in
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely “Maintaining And Caring For Your Vehicle” for informa-
careful of motor traffic. tion about the inflatable spare tire, its use, and operation.
Extending The Wrench Jack Locations

1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
CAUTION!
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is
still on the ground. Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated.
2. There are two jack engagement locations on each side
of the vehicle body. These locations are on the sill
flange of the vehicle body.
7
Front Jack Location Front Jack Engaged
Rear Jacking Location Rear Jack Engaged
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING!

under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
where it can be raised on a lift. hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
3. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn to the
right until the jack head is properly engaged in the 5. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with wheel
described location. Do not raise the vehicle until you covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do
are sure the jack is securely engaged. not pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right, hub.
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until 6. Install the inflatable spare on the car, located in the 7
the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is rear cargo area of the vehicle.
obtained to install the compact spare tire. Minimum
tire lift provides maximum stability. CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the inflatable spare tire with the
valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING!

damaged if the inflatable spare tire is mounted To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
incorrectly. do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
NOTE: Do not install the wheel cover on the inflatable

spare tire.
7. Leave the car on the jack and start inflating the
inflatable spare after the tire has been mounted to the
car. Secure the wheel to the hub by tightening the nuts
with wrench. After inflation, once the vehicle is low-
ered you will have a second opportunity to “torque”
the lug nuts.
8. Inflate the tire to the prescribed pressure 60 psi
Mounting Inflatable Spare Tire (4.2 Bar) using the Portable Air Compressor or Tire
Service Kit if equipped. Refer to “Portable Air Com-
pressor” in this section for usage procedure if
equipped. Refer to “Tire Service Kit For Inflating Tire” 11. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
in this section for usage procedure if equipped
9. Lower the car once the inflatable Spare has reached its
WARNING!
pressure and the compressor-hose has been removed A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
from the tire valve. hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until repaired or replaced immediately.
each nut has been tightened twice. Refer to “Torque
Specifications” in the “Technical Data” section for
proper wheel lug nut torque. If in doubt about the 7
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service
station.
12. Place the deflated (flat) tire and foam tray cover
assembly in the rear cargo area. Do not stow the
deflated tire in the inflatable spare tire location.
Have the full-sized tire repaired or replaced, as soon
as possible.
13. Stow the jack back in the stowage compartment and
place the access panel back. The stud of the storage
are must be threaded through the lower part of the
jack. Then turn the Jack Screw clockwise to secure it
in place.
NOTE: Stow the foam tray and components in the cargo
area. Storing The Jack
1 — Jack Screw
2 — Jack
3 — Stud
Portable Air Compressor — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Portable Air
Compressor. Use the Portable Air Compressor located in
the side compartment of the cargo area to inflate the
inflatable tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar).
7
Portable Air Compressor
1 — Power Plug
2 — Deflation Button
3 — Pressure Gauge
4 — Power Button
5 — Air Hose
Portable Air Compressor Usage With Inflatable Spare 3. Install the Inflatable Spare tire as
Tire described in the Jack Instructions
section in this manual. Make sure
1. Remove the Portable Air Compressor from the storage
that the valve stem is located near
location.
the ground, and then screw the air
2. Raise the vehicle as described in the hose of the Portable Air compressor
Jacking Instructions within this sec- to the valve stem.
tion.
4. Uncoil the power plug and connect
it the vehicles 12 Volt power Outlet.
5. Always start the engine before 7. Inflate the tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar)
turning ON the Portable Air Com- recommended as per the label on
pressor. the wheel or if the vehicle equipped
with the inflatable spare tire pres-
sure indicated on the Tire and
Loading information label located
on the driver-side door opening.
6. Switch the power button ON.
NOTE: If the tire is over inflated, use the deflation button
to reduce the tire air pressure.
8. After the tire reaches the recom-
mended pressure, lower the vehicle 7
with the jack as described in the
Jack Instructions section in this
manual.
9. Remove the speed limit label
WARNING!
sticker from the Portable Air Com-
pressor and place it on the center of • Do not lift or carry the Portable Air Compressor by
the steering wheel. the hose.
• Always stow the Portable Air Compressor only in
the provided place.
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get hot
10. Return the Portable Air Compressor to the foam tray after use, so it should be handled carefully.
and secure it with the strap. Store the foam tray in the • Keep the Portable Air Compressor away from open
cargo area. flames or heat source.
Tire Service Kit For Inflating Tire — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Service Kit.
Use the Tire Service Kit located in the side compartment
of the cargo area to inflate the inflatable tire to 60 psi
(4.2 Bar).
Tire Service Kit And Components And Operation Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and
turn to this position for air mode op-
eration only.
Tire Service Kit Components 7

1 — Mode Select Knob Selecting Sealant Mode
2 — Sealant/Air Hose
3 — Hose Accessories Push in the Mode Select Knob and
4 — Sealant Bottle turn to this position to inject the Tire
5 — Power Plug Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the
6 — Power Switch
tire.
Using The Power Button
WARNING!
Push and release the Power Button
once to turn On the Tire Service Kit. • Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
Push and release the Power Button heat source.
again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit. • A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
the place provided. Failure to follow these warn-
Using The Deflation Button ings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
Push the Deflation Button to reduce
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
the air pressure in the tire if it becomes
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,
swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes
skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immedi-
ately with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as
possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
(Continued)
kit when running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
necessary to place the valve stem in this position
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In before proceeding.
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a phy-
sician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of 3. Place the transmission in PARK and cycle the ignition
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth imme- in the OFF position.
diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of 4. Ensure the park brake is engaged.
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately. Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Remove the Tire Service Kit from the storage location.
Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
2. Uncoil the Sealant/Air Hose. Re- 7
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
move the cap from the valve stem
Hazard Warning flashers.
and then screw the fitting in at the
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the end of the Sealant/Air Hose clock-
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground. wise onto the valve stem.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose to reach the
valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the
ground. This will provide the best positioning of the
3. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert 7. Turn the Mode Select Knob to Air
the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt Mode position.
power outlet.
4. Place the Tire Service Kit on the ground next to the NOTE: Do not fill inflatable spare tire with sealant. Refer
deflated tire. to “Tire Service Kit” in this chapter for repairing tires.
5. Engage parking brake before turning the engine ON.
6. Always start the engine before 8. Switch the power button ON.
turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
9. Inflate the tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar) 11. Remove the speed limit label
recommended as per the label on sticker from the Tire Service Kit
the wheel or if the vehicle equipped and place it on the center of the
with the inflatable spare tire pres- steering wheel.
sure indicated on the Tire and
Loading information label located
on the driver-side door opening.
12. Return the Tire Service Kit to the foam tray and
NOTE: If the tire is over inflated, use the deflation button
secure it with the strap. Store the foam tray in the
to reduce the tire air pressure.
cargo area.
10. After the tire reaches the recom-
Road Tire Installation 7
mended pressure, lower the ve-
hicle with the jack as described in Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
the Jack Instructions section in this
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
manual.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting
studs which are on each side of the valve stem. Install
the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut 3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use
a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
2 — Valve Notch 5 — Mounting Stud handle counterclockwise.
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
WARNING!
each nut has been tightened twice. Refer to “Torque
Specifications” in the “Technical Data” section for To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
proper wheel lug nut torque. If in doubt about the do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service result in serious injury.
station.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a handle counterclockwise.
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel. 4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased 7
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
1. Mount the road tire on the axle. each nut has been tightened twice. Refer to “Torque
Specifications” in the “Technical Data” section for
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped proper wheel lug nut torque. If in doubt about the
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
lug nuts. wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service
station.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a 6. Install the Tire Service Kit or Portable Air Compressor
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly if equipped and tighten the strap.
seated against the wheel.
7. Install access panel door.
Return Inflatable Spare Tire
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
To return Inflatable Spare Tire to its storage location.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Service Kit.
1. Return the Jack. Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread
2. Deflate the spare tire. Use the Tire Inflator Kit or can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g.,
Portable Air Compressor and push the deflation but- screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire
ton to do this step. Refer to “Tire Inflator Kit” or Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to
“Portable Air Compressor” if equipped in this section approximately -4°F (-20°C). This kit will provide a tem-
for additional information. The inflatable spare tire porary tire seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to
will return to its original shape. 100 miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of 50 mph
(90 km/h).
3. Install the inflatable spare tire back into its original
stowage location and position facing outward. Tire Service Kit Storage
4. Install the foam tray with wrench and funnel installed. The Tire Service Kit is secured with a strap and is stored
in the storage bin located behind the rear cargo trim
5. Install and tighten the wing nut by hand. panel.
Tire Service Kit And Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Components 7

Tire Service Kit Location 1 — Mode Select Knob
2 — Sealant/Air Hose
3 — Hose Accessories
4 — Sealant Bottle
5 — Power Plug
6 — Power Switch
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Using The Power Button
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following Push and release the Power Button
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode. once to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
Selecting Air Mode Push and release the Power Button
again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
turn to this position for air pump
operation only.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to reduce
the air pressure in the tire if it becomes
Selecting Sealant Mode over-inflated.

turn to this position to inject the Tire
Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the
tire. Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle prior to the
expiration date (printed at the lower right hand corner
on the bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the • You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
system. Refer to “Sealant Bottle Replacement” in this bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
section. located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
• The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application use and
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air
need to be replaced after each use. Always replace
Pump and make sure the Mode Select Knob is in the
these components immediately at your original equip-
Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting
ment vehicle dealer.
sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form, intended to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm)
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses. 7
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and
properly discarded.
WARNING!
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire • Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
Service Kit. vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
(Continued)

• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
under the following circumstances: the place provided. Failure to follow these warn-
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately ings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger. you, your passengers, and others around you.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage. • Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
– If the tire has any damage from driving with Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
extremely low tire pressure. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes
tire. skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immedi-
– If the wheel has any damage. ately with plenty of water if there is any contact
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as
the wheel. possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or • Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
heat source. case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a phy-
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a sician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
(Continued)
(Continued)
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary
to place the valve stem in this position before proceed-
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth imme- ing.
diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician 3. Place the transmission in PARK and cycle the ignition
immediately. in the OFF position.
4. Set the parking brake.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove the cap from
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
the fitting at the end of the hose.
Hazard Warning flashers. 7
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire.
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose to reach the
valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the
ground. This will provide the best positioning of the
kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and
3. Remove the cap from the valve Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire:
stem and then screw the fitting at
1. Always start the engine before
the end of the Sealant Hose onto the
turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert

the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt
2. Ensure the Mode Select Knob is to
power outlet.
the Sealant Mode position.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or

nails) from the tire.
3. After pushing the Power Button, Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect
the sealant (white fluid) will flow the Sealant Hose to the valve stem. Check that the
from the Sealant Bottle through the Mode Select Knob is in the Sealant Mode position and
Sealant Hose and into the tire. not Air Mode. Push the Power Button to turn On the
Tire Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug to a different 12 Volt power
outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
Make sure the engine is running before turning ON
tire.
the Tire Service Kit.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10
3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to previous use.
seconds through the Sealant Hose: 7
Call for assistance.
1. Push the Power Button to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Disconnect the Sealant Hose from the valve stem.
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the 2. The pump will start to inject air into
Sealant Hose: the tire immediately after the Seal-
ant Bottle is empty. Continue to
1. Continue to operate the pump until
operate the pump and inflate the
sealant is no longer flowing
tire to the cold tire inflation pres-
through hose (typically takes 30 - 70
sure found on the tire and loading
seconds). As the sealant flows
information label located in the
through the Sealant Hose, the Pres-
driver-side door opening. Check
sure Gauge can read as high as 70
the tire pressure by looking at the
psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge
Pressure Gauge.
will decrease quickly from approxi-
mately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
tire pressure when the Sealant pressure within 15 minutes:
Bottle is empty.
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at 2. Remove the speed limit label from
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes: the Tire Service Kit and place
sticker on the steering wheel.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
1. Push the Power Button to turn off
the Tire Service Kit. 3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle
storage location. Proceed to “Drive Vehicle.”
7
Drive Vehicle: After Driving:
Immediately after injecting sealant Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
and inflating the tire, drive the vehicle To Use Tire Service Kit” in this section before continuing.
5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove the cap from
distribution of the Tire Service Kit
the fitting at the end of the hose.
Sealant within the tire. Do not exceed
50 mph (80 km/h). 2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
WARNING! 3. Remove the cap from the valve
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. stem and then screw the fitting at
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after the end of the Sealant Hose onto the
using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 valve stem.
km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to
follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you. Have the tire checked as soon as pos-
sible at an Authorized Dealer.
4. Uncoil the power plug and insert 6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and
the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt turn to the Air Mode position.
power outlet.
5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the fit- 7. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
ting at the end of hose onto the Gauge.
valve stem.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive 7
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher: 4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
1. Push the Power Button to turn on
service center.
Tire Service Kit and inflate the tire
to the cold tire inflation pressure 5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the steering
found on the tire and loading infor- wheel after the tire has been repaired.
mation label located in the driver-
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at your authorized dealer as
side door opening.
soon as possible. Refer to “Sealant Bottle Replace-
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla- ment”.
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem, using the Tire Service Kit.
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
Sealant Bottle Replacement:
Volt outlet.
1. Unwrap the power cord.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
the vehicle. 2. Unwrap the hose.
3. Remove the bottle cover.
4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to release. NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor.
precautions.
NOTE:
• For sealant bottle installation follow these steps re-
CAUTION!
verse order. Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
• Replacement sealant bottles are available at authorized other booster source with a system voltage greater
service centers. than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump- WARNING! 7
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located on the left side of
the engine compartment.
Negative Remote Battery Post
Positive Remote Battery Post

3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
WARNING!
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when- parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by WARNING!
moving fan blades.
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
could establish a ground connection and personal
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
injury could result.
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your Jump-Starting Procedure
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or 7
WARNING!
sparks away from the battery.
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission result in personal injury or property damage due to
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK. battery explosion.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
CAUTION!
cable to the negative post near the windshield cowl
Failure to follow these procedures could result in (exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle’s engine).
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle. WARNING!
Connecting The Jumper Cables Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri-
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the cal spark could cause the battery to explode and
positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
battery. ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper parts.
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
negative (-) post of the booster battery. start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
CAUTION!
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the dis- plugged in long enough without engine operation,
charged battery. the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery. starting.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable REFUELLING IN EMERGENCY
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. 7
The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is located with
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper the spare tire (if equipped) or in the upper storage bin. If
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the your vehicle is out of fuel and an auxiliary fuel can is
discharged battery. needed, insert the funnel into the filler neck and proceed
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle to fill the vehicle.
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
For more information on the Cap-Less Fuel System refer • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
to “Refuelling The Vehicle” in “Starting And Operating ” heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
in this manual. to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS from the engine cooling system.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac- CAUTION!
tion.
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
• On the highways — slow down. your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed. conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down “H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
an impending overheat condition: service.
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine WARNING!
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
You should be seated in the driver’s seat with your
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
foot firmly placed on the brake pedal to maintain
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
control of the vehicle before activating the Manual
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
Park Release. If possible, you should apply the
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
parking brake. Activating the Manual Park Release
will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not
secured or properly connected to a tow vehicle.
Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured 7
vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those
in or around the vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmis- 2. Apply the parking brake if possible.
sion will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery),
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
a Manual Park Release is available.
Manual Park Release access cover, which is to the
lower left of the steering column.
4. The Manual Park Release access cover is connected to
a red tether strap. Pull the tether strap out as far as it
will go, then release it. The transmission should now
be in NEUTRAL, allowing the vehicle to be moved.
NOTE: When the lever is locked in the released position,
the tether will remain outside of the trim panel and the
access cover cannot be re-installed.
5. Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
Manual Park Release Access Cover
Follow these steps to activate the Manual Park Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while seated in
the driver’s seat.
To Reset The Manual Park Release: NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
1. Pull the tether strap out again, then release it.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
2. Allow the tether to retract with the lever back to its more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal
original position. to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
3. Verify that the transmission is in PARK. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
4. Confirm that the tether has retracted fully and re-
wheels or racing the engine.
install the access cover. If the access cover cannot be
re-installed, repeat steps 1 through 3. NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake 7
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it Control” in “Safety” for further information. Once the
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.
CAUTION! WARNING!
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
for at least one minute after every five rocking- explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
reduce the risk of transmission failure during pro- longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
longed efforts to free a stuck vehicle. ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be- a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
tween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheel OFF the Ground ALL MODELS

Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Front OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent NOTE: 7
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip-
disabled before towing this vehicle (if rear wheels are
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
on the ground), to avoid inadvertent Electric Park
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake feature is
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
enabled or disabled via the customer programmable
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
features in the Uconnect Settings.
vehicles under tow must be observed.
• Vehicles with a discharged battery or total electrical
CAUTION!
failure when the electric parking brake (EPB) is en-
gaged, will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the rear Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
wheels off the ground when moving the vehicle onto a ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
flatbed. age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. Vehicle Recovery Tow Points
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must Your vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Recovery Points
towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a that can be used to recover a disabled vehicle, located on
towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front the underbody of the vehicle.
wheels raised).
NOTE:
NOTE: Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released,
and remains released, while being towed. • Ensure that the towing service tow hooks are properly
seated and secured in the attachment points.
• This recovery tow feature should be used by a trained
professional only.
• Use approved receptacle location to free the disabled
CAUTION!
vehicle from its environment.
Recovery feature:
• Is to be used by a professional ONLY.
• Is used only to provide recovery of the vehicle.
• Is NOT to be used to recover secondary vehicle.
• Is NOT to be used for transporting the vehicle over
the road, i.e. “Flat Towing”.
Recovery load should:
• Be applied at constant speed.
• Be applied parallel to the center line of the length
of the vehicle. 7
• Not be an abrupt acceleration.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)

Front Recovery Points while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
NOTE: The Safehold feature will engage the Electric Park
Brake whenever the driver’s door is opened (if the
ignition is ON, transmission is not in PARK, and brake • When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
pedal is released). If you are towing this vehicle with the attach to front or rear suspension components.
ignition in the ON/RUN position, you must manually Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
disable the Electric Park Brake each time the driver’s towing.
door is opened, by pressing the brake pedal and then • Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
pushing the EPB switch down. remains released, while being towed.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
discharged, refer to “Manual Park Release” in this section (EARS)
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
in order to move the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
CAUTION! Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
in this guide for further information on the Enhanced
• Do not use sling-type equipment when towing.
Accident Response System (EARS) function.
Vehicle damage may occur.
(Continued)
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
in this guide for further information on the Event Data
Recorder (EDR).
7
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 SCHEDULE SERVICING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
▫ Maintenance Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615 ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
▫ Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .617 ▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .618 ▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
▫ Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619 ▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619 ▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630 8
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620 ▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621 ▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622 䡵 RAISING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624 䡵 TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
612 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639 䡵 STORING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
▫ Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .649 䡵 BODYWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657 ▫ Protection From Atmospheric Agents . . . . . . .667
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659 ▫ Body And Underbody Maintenance. . . . . . . . .668
▫ Tire Chains (Traction Devices) . . . . . . . . . . . .661 ▫ Preserving The Bodywork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
▫ Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .663 䡵 INTERIORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM ▫ Seats And Fabric Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664
▫ Plastic And Coated Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664
▫ Leather Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664
▫ Glass Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE 613
SCHEDULE SERVICING than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to “Vehicle Info” in “Display” in “Getting To
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
Know Your Instrument Panel”.
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
scheduled maintenance. vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
concern for fleet customers.
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
cold ambient temperatures will influence when the “Oil
• Check engine oil level.
Change Required” message is displayed. Severe Operat-
ing Conditions can cause the change oil message to • Check windshield washer fluid level.
8
illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last
reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, • Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
within the next 500 miles (805 km). damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator on.
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
brake master cylinder, fill as needed. Change Indicator System:
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights. • Change oil and filter
Required Maintenance Intervals • Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregu-
lar wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following system turns on.
page for the required maintenance intervals. • Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses
• Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
Maintenance Plan
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage:
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
112,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends,
X X X X X X X
and replace if necessary. 8
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler
X
pulley, and replace if necessary
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage:
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
112,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Replace spark plugs ** X

Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years
or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes X X
first.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
WARNING!
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
• You can be badly injured working on or around a is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you operated predominately at idle or only very low engine
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a Duty.
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
hicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 6 — Battery

2 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Window Washer Fill
4 — Engine Air Cleaner
5 — Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
Checking Oil Level Adding Washer Fluid
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut OFF.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
8
CAUTION! Windshield Washer Fluid Cap
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration, or The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine. compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and Maintenance-Free Battery
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
residual washer fluid. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some tenance required.
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance. WARNING!
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
rating information can be found on most washer fluid over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
containers. splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water. Refer to
WARNING! “Jump-Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
Commercially available windshield washer solvents further information.
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
must be exercised when filling or working around flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
the washer solution. a booster battery or any other booster source with
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued)

an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable • If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
clamps to touch each other. vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
after handling.
DEALER SERVICE
CAUTION! Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
available which include detailed service information for
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before 8
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
attempting any procedure yourself.
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
terminal posts and free of corrosion. systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
(Continued)
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
WARNING!
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
You can be badly injured working on or around a 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If concern for fleet customers.
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a Engine Oil Selection
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic. For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
Engine Oil recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Scheduled Servicing” in this section for
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil Engine Oil Viscosity
Identification Symbol MOPAR SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or
This symbol means that the oil has equivalent is recommended for all operating tempera-
been certified by the American tures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting
Petroleum Institute (API). The and vehicle fuel economy.
manufacturer only recommends
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
API Certified engine oils.
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W- engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com-
20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 en- partment” illustration in this section.
gine oils.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num- 8
CAUTION! ber should not be used.
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Synthetic Engine Oils indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
your area.
are followed.
Engine Oil Filter
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine
oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
number should not be used. at every engine oil change.
Materials Added To Engine Oil Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad- This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi- high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
tives. service. MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil
filters and are recommended.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
Refer to the “Scheduled Servicing” in this section for the The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
proper maintenance intervals. varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “Sever Duty Conditions”
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-
maintenance interval if applicable.
mended.
WARNING! Air Conditioner Maintenance
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can For best possible performance, your air conditioner
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air at the start of each warm season. This service should
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this 8
near the engine compartment before starting the time.
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING! CAUTION!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi- system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling - R–1234yf
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD, R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluo-
for further warranty information roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal with a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant recommends that air conditioning service be performed
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected by authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equip-
should be done by an experienced technician. ment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Body Lubrication Windshield Wiper Blades
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, tions of salt or road film.
such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after from a dry windshield.
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
components to ensure proper function. When performing the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha- petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. 8
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small performance of blades may be present with chattering,
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-
sary.
Exhaust System
CAUTION!
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust • The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
system. leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; • Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex- vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam- In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
WARNING!
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain against you.
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
CO, refer to “Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
information. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park tions, should be obtained immediately.
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve- age:
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con- • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, 8
tact anything that can burn. when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure vehicle.
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions. for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
Cooling System
down the face of the condenser.
WARNING! Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If entire system for leaks.
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
Engine Coolant Checks If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
CAUTION!
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
needed to be added to the system please contact your gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
local authorized dealer. damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains ant is different and should not be mixed with
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
MS.90032). ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
Refer to the “Scheduled Servicing” in this section for the coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
proper maintenance intervals. system in an emergency, the cooling system will 8
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
Selection Of Coolant OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Data” for thorized dealer as soon as possible.
further information. • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
(Continued)
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with • We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an- Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Ma-
tifreeze) is not recommended. terial Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
Adding Coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentra-
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that al- tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
lows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool- (−37°C) are anticipated.
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform-
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
ing to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main- Cooling System Pressure Cap
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac- The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
the vehicle is operated. (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
NOTE: recovery tank.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact your WARNING!
local authorized dealer.
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom- engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool 8
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
possible. system is hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
Coolant Level
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en- method for determining that the coolant level is ad-
gine damage may result. equate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be be-
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant tween the “MAX” and “MIN” lines marked on the bottle.
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac-
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check tory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a
with your local authorities to determine the disposal month.
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Points To Remember • If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
for leaks.
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor- • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor- MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine protection of your engine which contains aluminum
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator. components.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the 8
condenser clean.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti- • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
expansion bottle must also be protected against freez- ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
ing.
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) Brake Master Cylinder
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis- The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when
sions. performing under hood services or immediately if the
Brake System “Brake Warning Light” is illuminated.
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
system components should be inspected periodically. removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
Refer to the “Scheduled Servicing” for the proper main- fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
tenance intervals. fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level
WARNING! should be checked when pads are replaced. However,
low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and may be needed.
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and fer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Data” for
possible brake damage. You would not have your full further information.
braking capacity in an emergency.

• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Tech- spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
nical Data” for further information. Using the the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
your brake system and/or impair its performance. taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is • Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
also identified on the original factory installed the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
hydraulic master cylinder reservoir. damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or This could result in a collision.
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master Automatic Transmission
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake 8
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the Selection Of Lubricant
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro- ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
This could result in a collision.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Data” for
(Continued)
fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the trans- its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
mission fluid at the correct level using the recommended tives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
fluid. transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they
may adversely affect seals.
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be
used.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
CAUTION! the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter Fluid Level Check
shudder. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Tech-
nical Data” for fluid specifications. The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Special Additives Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
check your transmission fluid level using special service
any special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunc- Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How-
tion, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the ve- contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
hicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe disassembled for any reason.
transmission damage.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
CAUTION! In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to
a your authorized dealer or service station.
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam- TIRES
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately. Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
Fluid And Filter Changes 8
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures and Tire
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the Loading.
life of the vehicle.
Tire Markings NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards 4 — Maximum Load

Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. Tire Identification Number (TIN)
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced- with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com- tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: side of the tire.
T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded 8
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall. 8
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
Pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-
cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
8
Tire And Loading Information Placard adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” sec-
tion of this manual. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
650 lbs [295 kg]).
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
• For the following example, the combined weight of
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
capacity calculated in step 4.
(392 kg). 8
Safety
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading WARNING!
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
cause collisions.
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
overload them.
in overheating and tire failure.
Tires — General Information • Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure.
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and • Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve-
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control. 8
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
• Safety and Vehicle Stability lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Economy
(Continued)
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Fuel Economy
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the resulting in higher fuel consumption.
right or left. Tread Wear
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure. Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability need for earlier tire replacement.
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
NOTE:
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause ride.
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Tire Inflation Pressures
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
vehicle to drift left or right. driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
At least once a month: 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side-
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
wall.
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under- Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
inflated. of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
CAUTION! 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al- the Winter.
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the 8
which could damage the valve stem. outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure outside temperature condition.
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
WARNING!
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low. High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi- maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high 75 mph (120 km/h).
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle Radial Ply Tires
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original WARNING!
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
meets the following criteria: (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
• The tire has not been driven on when flat. Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
(sidewall damage is not repairable). Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi-
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm). ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
additional information. capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have mode. 8
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme- See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and mation.
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Tire Spinning Tread Wear Indicators
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or to help you in determining when your tires should be
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop- replaced.
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
Tire Tread
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be tenance schedule is highly recommended.
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information. WARNING!
Life Of Tire Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
factors including, but not limited to: follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
• Driving style. in serious injury or death.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little 8
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment. Replacement Tires
• Distance driven. The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu- It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva- dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and WARNING!
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex- • Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
ample found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
this manual for more information relating to the Load Some combinations of unapproved tires and
Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. wheels may change suspension dimensions and
performance characteristics, resulting in changes to
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle.
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously This can cause unpredictable handling and stress
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a to steering and suspension components. You could
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels. (Continued)
Tire Types
lose control and have a collision resulting in seri- All Season Tires — If Equipped
ous injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle. Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or between different all season tires. All season tires can be
capacity, other than what was originally equipped identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
index could result in tire overloading and failure. failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
You could lose control and have a collision. handling of your vehicle.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
failure and loss of vehicle control. Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
8
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
CAUTION! on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
may result in false speedometer and odometer read- when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
ings. roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informa-
tion, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or Snow Tires
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
WARNING! If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi-
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You nal equipment tires. Use snow tires
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury only in sets of four; failure to do so
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates may adversely affect the safety and
the possibility of loss of vehicle control. handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be Wheel — If Equipped
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro- Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
checked before using these tire types. equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
Spare Tires — If Equipped of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
tire rotation pattern.
“In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
CAUTION! The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a 8
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
compact or limited use temporary spare installed. the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
Damage to the vehicle may result. driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip- replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
on your vehicle at the first opportunity. spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
wheel on the vehicle at any given time. front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
WARNING! to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
only. With these spares, do not drive more than original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited first opportunity.
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
(Continued)
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as of vehicle control.
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
first opportunity.
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
WARNING! 8
against damage:
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. In- • Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep • Install on front tires only.
(Continued)
• For a 235/65R17 or 235/60R18 tire, use of a snow
traction device with a maximum projection of 9 mm
beyond the tire profile is recommended. damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
WARNING! the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable • Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
handling. You could lose control and have a collision. • Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
CAUTION! • Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the • Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
following precautions: tions on the method of installation, operating
• Because of restricted traction device clearance be- speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
tween tires and other suspension components, it is suggested operating speed of the device manufac-
important that only traction devices in good condi- turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious • Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
(Continued)
Tire Rotation Recommendations The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
reversed.
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Scheduled Servicing” for the proper main- 8
tenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-
formed.
Tire Rotation
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
TIRE QUALITY GRADES habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The Traction Grades
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
your vehicle.
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
safety requirements in addition to these grades. concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on WARNING!
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
times as well on the government course as a tire graded include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the peak traction characteristics.
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
Temperature Grades
WARNING!
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
test wheel. ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive STORING THE VEHICLE
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance, which all passen- If the vehicle should remain stationary for more than a
ger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor month, observe the following precautions:
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre- • Park your vehicle in a covered, dry and possibly airy 8
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test location the windows open slightly.
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
• Check that the Electric Park Brake is not engaged.
• Disconnect the negative (-) terminal from the battery
post and be sure that the battery is fully charged.
During storage check battery charge quarterly.
• If you do not disconnect the battery from the electrical • Do not drain the engine cooling system.
system, check the battery charge every thirty days.
• Whenever you leave the vehicle is stationary for two
• Clean and protect the painted parts by applying pro- weeks or more, run idle the engine for approximately
tective waxes. five minutes, with the air conditioning system on and
high fan speed. This will ensure a proper lubrication of
• Clean and protect polished metal parts by applying
the system, thus minimizing the possibility of damage
protective waxes.
to the compressor when the vehicle is put back into
• Apply talcum powder to the front and rear wiper operation.
blades and leave raised from the glass.
NOTE: When the vehicle has not been started or driven
• Cover the vehicle with an appropriate cover taking for at least 30 days, an Extended Park Start Procedure is
care not to damage the painted surface by dragging required to start the vehicle. Refer to “Starting Proce-
across dirty surfaces. Do not use plastic sheeting which dures” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
will not allow the evaporation of moisture present on tion.
the surface of the vehicle.
• Inflate the tires at a pressure of +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar)
higher than recommended on the tire placard and
check it periodically.
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
CAUTION!
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
Before removal of the positive and negative termi- have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
nals to the battery, wait at least a minute with body protection.
ignition switch in the OFF position and close the The following maintenance recommendations will enable
drivers door. When reconnecting the positive and you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
negative terminals to the battery be sure the ignition resistance built into your vehicle.
switch is in the OFF position and the drivers door is
closed. What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
BODYWORK paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Protection From Atmospheric Agents The most common causes are:
8
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo- • Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
• Stone and gravel impact.
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly • Insects, tree sap and tar.
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, • Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Body And Underbody Maintenance
CAUTION!
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly size may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
Cleaning Headlights
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR Wheel Cleaner. Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break-
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or age than glass headlights.
Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma- Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
nently damage this finish and such damage is not cov- different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
this finish. lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Preserving The Bodywork
CAUTION!
Washing
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve- such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild scratch metal and painted surfaces.
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with • Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274
clear water. kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu- decals.
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove. Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
a month. 8
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, INTERIORS
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
Seats And Fabric Parts
considered the responsibility of the owner.
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
carpeting.
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
WARNING!
the owner. Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
packaged and sealed.
Seat Belt Maintenance
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
• Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle. If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the
vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
CAUTION!
buckles do not work properly.
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
WARNING! suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do CAUTION!
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt Damage caused by these type of products may not be
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.). Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
8
Plastic And Coated Parts The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
CAUTION!
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
clean damp cloth. based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
2. Dry with a soft cloth. damage to the seat may result.
Leather Parts Glass Surfaces
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
leather upholstery. with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
directly on the mirror.
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
TECHNICAL DATA
CONTENTS
䡵 IDENTIFICATION DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675 ▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .680
▫ Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . .675 ▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .680
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE ▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .681
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . .682
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683 9
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679 (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . .684
▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications . . . . .679 ▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684
674 TECHNICAL DATA
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684 䡵 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685 ▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685 ▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686
TECHNICAL DATA 675
IDENTIFICATION DATA
Vehicle Identification Number
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears stamped under the right front seat
and printed on the Automobile Information Disclosure
Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle
registration and title.
Vehicle Identification Number

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
9
676 TECHNICAL DATA
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/ Lug Nut/

Bolt Size Bolt
Socket
Size
100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m) M12 x 1.5 19 mm
Wheel Mounting Surface
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
tightening. nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
TECHNICAL DATA 677
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
These engines are designed to meet all

emissions regulations and provide opti-
Torque Patterns mum fuel economy and performance
when using high quality unleaded “Regu-
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
lar” gasoline having a posted octane num-
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated 9
ber of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of
against the wheel.
higher octane “Premium” gasoline is not required, as it
will not provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in
these engines.
678 TECHNICAL DATA
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im-
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard proved performance and durability of engine and fuel
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme- system components.
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
Materials Added To Fuel
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these that have these additives will help improve fuel
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid- economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle perfor-
ering service for the vehicle. mance.
Reformulated Gasoline Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner line contains a higher level of deter-
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. gents to further aide in minimizing
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe- engine and fuel system deposits.
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im- When available, the usage of Top Tier
prove air quality.
TECHNICAL DATA 679
Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit www.toptier-
gas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
Retailers. problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they
and varnish removal may contain active solvents or should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater
similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket than 15% ethanol (E-15).
and diaphragm materials.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
genates such as ethanol. void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications 9
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gaso- Modifications that allow the engine to run on com-
line containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of pressed natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may
these blends may result in starting and drivability result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel
system components. Problems that result from running
(Continued)
680 TECHNICAL DATA
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufacturer Fuel System Cautions
and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. CAUTION!
MMT In Gasoline Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) performance:
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is • The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine per-
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage formance and damage the emissions control sys-
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without tem.
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug • An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
life and reduces emissions system performance in some malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal assistance.
and California reformulated gasoline.
(Continued)
TECHNICAL DATA 681
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being WARNING!
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor- Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
mance problems resulting from the use of such monoxide poisoning:
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
manufacturer and may void or not be covered monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control engine running for an extended period. If the
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
you. running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into 9
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
(Continued)
682 TECHNICAL DATA
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING!

time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive yellow gas cap can operate on E-85.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15%
E-85 General Information unleaded gasoline.
The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel
vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a WARNING!
unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
Unleaded Gasoline Only and a yellow fuel cap. Please cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-
refer to the other sections of this manual for information ing materials lit or products that can cause spark in or
on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube
non-Flexible Fuel powered vehicles. cap (gas cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a
cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame.
TECHNICAL DATA 683
Fuel Requirements NOTE:
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on • Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
unleaded gasoline with any octane rating, or solely E-85 non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and
fuel, or any mixture of these fuels. rough idle following start up may be experienced even
For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating if the above recommendations are followed, especially
between E-85 and unleaded gasoline. when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
When switching fuel types: • Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
• Add 5 gallons (19 liters) or more when refueling. engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
• Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
least 5 miles (8 km). additive, such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron
may be used.
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or driveability problems during warm up. 9
684 TECHNICAL DATA
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles until the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel.
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formu- NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the
in MOPAR engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
FCA US Material Standard MS-6395. It is recommended
Cruising Range
that engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of Material Standard MS-6395 be used. Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
MS-6395 contains additional requirements, developed than gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be
during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional pro- experienced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/kilometers per
tection to FCA US LLC engines. liter and the driving range will decrease by approxi-
mately 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time
it takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
TECHNICAL DATA 685
Replacement Parts Maintenance
All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel
Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol. CAUTION!
Ethanol compatible service components are required. Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
CAUTION! may affect drivability.
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
9
686 TECHNICAL DATA
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L Engines 19 Gallons 71 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-20 , API 5 quarts 4.7 liters
Certified)
Cooling System*
3.6 Liter Engine (MOPAR 13.1 Quarts — Standard Duty 12.4 Liters — Standard Duty Cool-
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Cooling ing
Year/150,000 Mile Formula) 13.4 Quarts — Heavy Duty Cool- 12.7 Liters — Heavy Duty Cooling
ing
* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.
TECHNICAL DATA 687
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer
to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a MOPAR Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs. 9
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Flex Fuel (E85) Engine – If 87 Octane, Up To 85% Ethanol.
Equipped
688 TECHNICAL DATA
CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en- coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
damage and may decrease corrosion protection. be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool- may plug the radiator.
ant is different and should not be mixed with • This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en- propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat- Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine tifreeze) is not recommended.
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
(Continued)
TECHNICAL DATA 689
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Automatic Transmission Use only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Trans-
mission Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid,
SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only
recommended brake fluids.
Refrigerant Use only refrigerant R-1234yf
Charge Amounts:
Single A/C System — 880g (1.94 lb) 9
Dual A/C System — 1050g (2.31 lb)
Compressor Oil Use only PAG oil PSD-1:
Single A/C System — 140 ml
Dual A/C System — 190 ml
MULTIMEDIA
CONTENTS
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694 䡵 AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .743
䡵 PERSONALIZED MENU BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694 䡵 UCONNECT THEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . .745
䡵 CYBERSECURITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .695 ▫ Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .746
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696 ▫ Accessing The System From The Uconnect
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .747
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 5.0
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .697 ▫ Uconnect Theater Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .748
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 8.4 ▫ Accessing The System From The Uconnect Theater
Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .718 Rear Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .749
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . .742 ▫ Pairing The Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .750 10
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .743 ▫ Unpairing The Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .751

692 MULTIMEDIA
▫ Media Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .752 ▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .770
▫ Uconnect Theater Remote Control . . . . . . . . . .753 䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .770
▫ Uconnect Theater Home Screen And ▫ Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . . .770
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .755
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
▫ Play A DVD/Blu-ray Or USB Media File From TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .772
Uconnect Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .756
▫ Introducing Uconnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .772
▫ Blu-ray Controls – Disc Specific Functions . . . .759
▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .773
▫ Uconnect Theater Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .760
▫ Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .775
▫ Using The Rear Video USB Port . . . . . . . . . . .763
▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .776
▫ Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .764
▫ Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .778
▫ Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .765
▫ Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .779
▫ Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .768
▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .781
▫ Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed . . .769
▫ Climate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .783
▫ Rear Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .769
MULTIMEDIA 693
▫ Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .784 ▫ SiriusXM Travel Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .791
▫ Uconnect Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .785 ▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .792
▫ Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .786 ▫ Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .792
▫ Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .786 ▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .794
▫ Mobile App. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .786 ▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .794
▫ Voice Texting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .788 䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .795
▫ Yelp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .790
10
694 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT RADIOS
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio,
refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual.
PERSONALIZED MENU BAR

The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
these steps:
Personalized Menu Bar

1. Press the “Apps ” button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace
an existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
The replaced shortcut will now be an active App/
shortcut on the main menu bar.
MULTIMEDIA 695
CYBERSECURITY The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
installed.
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive infor-
mation. This information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly. WARNING!
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security • It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications. breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over including safety related systems, could be im-
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, paired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar may result in an accident involving serious injury
to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require or death.
software updates to improve the usability and perfor- • ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
mance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle sys- of unknown origin could possibly contain mali- 10
tems. cious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it
(Continued)
696 MULTIMEDIA
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications can-
not be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to information and private communications without your
be breached. consent. For further information, refer to “Privacy Prac-
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle be- tices - If Equipped with Uconnect 8.4 Radio” in “Multi-
havior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized media” in your Owner’s Manual Radio Supplement and
dealer immediately. “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in your Own-
NOTE:
er’s Manual on the DVD.
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding
software updates. UCONNECT SETTINGS
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners the touchscreen and/or buttons on the faceplate located
should: on the center of the instrument panel that allow you to
access and change the customer programmable features.
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software-
Many features can vary by vehicle.
update to learn about available Uconnect software
updates. Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g. Uconnect touchscreen.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
MULTIMEDIA 697
Buttons on the faceplate are located below, and beside the Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
Uconnect system in the center of the instrument panel. In 5.0 Settings
addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on
the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll through
menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the
center of the control knob one or more times to select or
change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have Display Off and
back arrow buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Display Off button on the faceplate to turn off
the Uconnect screen. Push the Display Off button on the
faceplate a second time to turn the screen on.
Push the Back Arrow button on the faceplate to exit out
of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system. Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons
On The Faceplate
10
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
698 MULTIMEDIA
Push the MORE button on the faceplate, then press KeySense
the “Settings ” button on the touchscreen to display The vehicle’s KeySense settings are protected by a unique
the settings menu screen. In this mode the Uconnect 4-digit PIN, which the vehicle owner creates when ac-
system allows you to access all of the available pro- cessing the specific settings for the first time. This 4-digit
grammable features. PIN can only be rest by an authorized dealer.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
After pressing the “KeySense” button on the touchscreen,
time.
and entering the KeySense PIN, the following settings
When making a selection, press the button on the touch- will be available:
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired • Forward Collision Warning
mode, press and release the preferred setting and make
your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an
the Back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen or the audible and/or visual warning to potential forward
Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous collisions. The feature can be can be set to Near, Medium,
menu. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the or Far.
right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or • Forward Collision Sensitivity
down through the available settings.
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system will warn
NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
in the “ON/RUN” position. The feature can be set to Near, Medium, or Far.
MULTIMEDIA 699
• Forward Collision Warning Active Braking • Front ParkSense Volume
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional HIGH. The KeySense default volume setting is ME-
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient DIUM. To make your selection, press the “Front
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The ParkSense Vol.” button on the touchscreen, until a check-
ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). The mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
system can be enabled or disabled by pressing “Forward has been selected. ParkSense will retain its last known
Collision Warning Active Braking” button on the touch- configuration state through ignition cycles.
screen. • Rear ParkSense Volume
• ParkSense — If Equipped
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the HIGH. The KeySense default volume setting is ME-
vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in RE- DIUM. To make your selection, press the “Rear
VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph ParkSense Vol.” button on the touchscreen, until a check-
(11 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only, mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
or Sound and Display. had been selected. ParkSense will retain its last known 10
configuration state through ignition cycles.
700 MULTIMEDIA
• Rear ParkSense Braking Assist exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn
signal is on. The KeySense default is “Light & Chime”.
When this feature is selected, the ParkSense system will
Press the “Lights” or “Lights & Chime” button on the
detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize
touchscreen to change the Blind Spot Alert status.
autonomous braking to help stop the vehicle (only en-
abled when ParkSense is also on). The system can be NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
enabled or disabled by pressing the “Rear ParkSense the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
Braking Assist” button on the touchscreen, until a check- not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
had been selected. alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
• Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
• Maximum Vehicle Speed
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects To set the maximum vehicle speed, press the “+” or “-”
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be button to select from 65/70/75/80/85 MPH (90/95/100/
activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected, 105/110 km/h).
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and
will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors.
When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind
Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the
MULTIMEDIA 701
• SiriusXM Setup Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
the screen or visit the provider online.
screen, the following settings will be available:
• Channel Skip NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
SiriusXM can be programmed to skip channels. To and is available for U.S. residents only.
make your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button
on the touchscreen, select the channels you would Display
like to skip.
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
• Subscription Information
the following settings will be available.
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio • Display Mode
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free When in this display you may select the “Auto” or
services, it will be necessary to access the information “Manual” display settings. To change Mode status, press
on the Subscription Information screen to re- and release the “Auto” or “Manual” button on the
subscribe. touchscreen.
10
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
to access the Subscription Information screen.
702 MULTIMEDIA
• Brightness the “Touchscreen Beep” button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
When in this display, you may select the overall screen
setting has been selected.
brightness with the headlights on or off. Adjust the
brightness with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the Units
touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale be- After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you
tween the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen. may select each unit of measure independently displayed
• Language in the Electronic Vehicle Information System (EVIC) or
Driver Information Display (DID). The following select-
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
able units of measure are listed below:
languages (English/Español/Français) for all display no-
menclature, including the trip functions and the naviga- • Custom
tion system (if equipped). Press the “Language” button • Speed
on the touchscreen, then press the desired language Select from: “mph” or “kph.”
button on the touchscreen. • Distance
• Touchscreen Beep Select from: “mi” or “km.”
• Fuel Consumption
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km”
sound heard when a touchscreen button is pressed. Press or “km/L.”
MULTIMEDIA 703
• Pressure Status setting press the “Show Time Status” button on the
Select from: “psi,” “kPa,” or “bar.” touchscreen and select from “ON” or “OFF.”
• Temperature • Sync Time — If Equipped
Select from: “°C,” or “°F.”
When in this display, you may sync the time with GPS.
Clock & Date Press the “Sync Time” button on the touchscreen and
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touch- select from “ON” or “OFF.”
screen the following settings will be available: Safety/Assistance
• Set Time and Format After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the
When in this display, you may set the time and format touchscreen the following settings will be available:
manually. Press the “Set Time and Format” button then • ParkView Backup Camera — If Equipped
choose from a 12 hour or 24 hour format. Press the
corresponding arrow above and below the current time When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
to adjust, then select “AM” or “PM.” delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the
• Show Time Status — If Equipped vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay 10
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
704 MULTIMEDIA
8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK front of you. The forward collision button is located in
or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. the Uconnect display in the controls settings. To turn the
• ParkView Backup Camera Delay — If Equipped FCW system OFF, push the forward collision button once
Press the “Parkview Backup camera Delay” button to turn the system OFF. To turn the FCW system back
on the touchscreen to turn the ParkView Delay ON or ON, push the forward collision button again to turn the
OFF. system ON. Changing the FCW status to “OFF” prevents
• ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines — If the system from warning you of a possible collision with
Equipped the vehicle in front of you.
When this feature is enabled, active (dynamic) grid • Forward Collision Warning-Plus (FCW+) — If
lines are overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image Equipped
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
back up path based on the steering wheel position. A The Front Collision Warning (FCW+) feature can be can
dashed center line overlay indicates the center of thebe set to Far, Med or Near. The default status of FCW+ is
the Med setting. This means the system will warn you of
vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/
receiver. a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when
you are a relatively medium distance away. This gives
• Forward Collision Warning On/Off — If Equipped you the medium reaction time. To change the setting for
The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows the system a more dynamic driving experience, select the Near
to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you
MULTIMEDIA 705
are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The
the FCW+ status, press and release the “Near” “Med” or system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and
“Far” buttons. Display.
• Forward Collision Warning-Plus (FCW+) Active • Rear ParkSense Volume — If Equipped
Braking — If Equipped Rear Park Assist chime volume settings can be se-
The FCW+ system includes Advanced Brake Assist lected from the EVIC/DID or Uconnect System (if
(ABA). When this feature is selected, it will apply the equipped). The chime volume settings include
brakes to slow your vehicle in case of potential “LOW,” “MEDIUM,” and “HIGH.” The factory de-
forward collision. The ABA applies additional brake fault volume setting is MEDIUM.
pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake • Front ParkSense Volume — If Equipped
pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The Front Park Assist chime volume settings can be
ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). selected from the EVIC/DID or Uconnect System (if
• ParkSense — If Equipped equipped). The chime volume settings include
“LOW,” “MEDIUM,” and “HIGH.” The factory de-
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the fault volume setting is MEDIUM.
vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in RE- • Rear ParkSense Braking Assist — If Equipped
VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph 10
When this feature is selected, the park assist system
(11 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or will detect objects located behind the vehicle and
utilize autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.
706 MULTIMEDIA
• LaneSense Warning — If Equipped this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is activated and will only show a visual alert in
When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which
the outside mirrors. When Lights & Chime mode is
the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential
activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a
lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to
visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible
provide either an “early,” “medium,” or “late” warning
alert when the turn signal is on. When Off is selected, the
zone start point. The default setting is “Medium”.
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To
• LaneSense Strength — If Equipped change the Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Off,”
“Lights” or “Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen.
When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
The default setting is “Lights”
The amount of directional torque the steering system can
apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
departure can be set at “Low,” “Medium” or “High.” The the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
default setting is “Medium”. not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
• Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature BSM not operating to specification.
can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blind
Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode. When
MULTIMEDIA 707
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped • Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
System” in “Safety” for system function and operating RUN position and the gear selector is in the REVERSE
information. To make your selection, press the “Hill Start position. The mirrors will move back to their previous
Assist” button on the touchscreen and make your selec- position when the transmission is shifted out of RE-
tion. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to VERSE. To make your selection, press the “Tilt Mirrors In
return to the previous menu. Reverse” button on the touchscreen and make your
selection. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
to return to the previous menu.
When this feature is selected, the system will automati-
Lights
cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press the After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the
“Rain Sensing” button on the touchscreen and make your following settings will be available.
selection. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen • Headlight Off Delay
to return to the previous menu. 10
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay
708 MULTIMEDIA
setting, press the Headlights Off Delay button on the turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90 your selection, press the “Lights w/Wipers” button on
seconds. The selected button will highlight indicating the touchscreen and make your selection.
that the setting has been selected. • Illuminated Approach
• Flash Lights With Sliding Door
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
When this feature is selected, the hazard lights will flash the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
when the sliding doors are opened or closed with the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
the passive entry feature. To make your selection, press press the “Illuminated Approach” button and choose
the “Flash Lights With Sliding Door” button on the either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90 seconds.
touchscreen, then select from “On” or “Off.” • Automatic High Beam Headlamps — If Equipped
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is will activate/deactivate automatically under certain con-
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap- ditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. Beams” button on the touchscreen, then select from “On”
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are or “Off.”
MULTIMEDIA 709
• Daytime Running Lights • Auto Door Locks
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto-
while the engine is running. To make your selection, matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph
press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touch- (20 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto Door
screen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” The button will Locks” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
highlight indicating that the setting has been selected. or “Off.”
• Flash Lights With Lock — If Equipped • Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash This feature provides automatic recall of all settings
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be mirrors, steering column position and radio station pre-
selected with or without the Sound Horn on Lock feature sets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and
selected. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the
w/Lock” button on the touchscreen, then choose “On” or “Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” button on the
“Off.” touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off.”
Doors & Locks 10
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available.
710 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat To make your selection, press the “Hands Free Lift Gate”
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set button on the touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off.”
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob is • Hands Free Sliding Door
used to unlock the door.
When this feature is selected, the sliding doors can
• Power Liftgate Alert
opened or closed using a Foot Activation in a single-kick
When this feature is selected, an alert plays when the motion. To make your selection, press the “Hands Free
power liftgate is raising or lowering. To make your Sliding Door” button on the touchscreen and select from
selection, press the “Power Liftgate Alert” button on the “On” or “Off.”
touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off.” • Auto Unlock On Exit
• Sliding Door Alert
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
When this feature is selected, a chime plays when the the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
sliding door reverses or an obstacle is sensed. To make PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
your selection, press the “Sliding Door Alert” button on opened. To make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock
the touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off.” on Exit” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
or “Off.”
• Hands Free Lift Gate
When this feature is selected, the rear liftgate can opened
or closed using a Foot Activation in a single-kick motion.
MULTIMEDIA 711
• Flash Lights With Lock activated. To make your selection, press the “Sound Horn
With Remote Start” button on the touchscreen and select
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
“ON” or “OFF.”
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob or the Passive Entry • Passive Entry
Feature. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
w/Lock” button on the touchscreen and select from “On” door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
or “Off.” Entry (RKE) Key Fob lock or unlock buttons. To make
• Horn With Lock your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the
touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off. Refer to
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Getting To Know Your Ve-
the Key Fob Lock button is pressed. To make your
hicle” for further information.
selection, press the “Horn w/Lock” button on the touch-
screen and select from ⬙Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd Press” • Remote Door Unlock/Door Unlock
• Horn With Remote Start — If Equipped When “Driver” is selected, only the driver’s door will
unlock on the first push of the Remote Keyless Entry
Press the “Horn w/Remote Start” button on the touch- 10
(RKE) Key Fob UNLOCK button, you must push the RKE
screen to change this display. When this feature is se-
lected, the horn will sound when the remote start is
712 MULTIMEDIA
Key Fob UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen- • Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
ger’s doors. When “All” is selected, all of the doors will Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
unlock on the first press of the RKE Key Fob UNLOCK
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
button.
heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when
NOTE: If “All” is programmed, all doors will unlock no temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When tempera-
matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is tures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
grasped. If “Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto-On
door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With
Touching the handle more than once will only result in Vehicle Start” button to select from “Off,” “Remote Start”
the driver’s door opening once. If the driver door is or “All Starts” until a check-mark appears next to setting,
opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used showing that setting has been selected.
to unlock all doors (or use RKE Key Fob).
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start” • Engine Off Power Delay — If Equipped
button on the touchscreen the following settings will be
available: When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped),
MULTIMEDIA 713
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if Seat” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening selected.
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Compass Settings — If Equipped
Engine Off Power Delay status press the “0 seconds,” “45
seconds,” “5 minutes” or “10 minutes” button on the After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the
touchscreen. touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Headlight Off Delay NOTE: Before compass calibration is performed, the
compass variance zone should be set for best results.
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds • Compass Variance
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off Press “Compass Variance” on the touchscreen to change
Delay status press the “+” or “–” button on the touch- this setting. You will then be able to select a compass
screen to select your desired time interval. variance of 1 through 15 per the compass variance zone
• Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped map figure.
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic 10
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is being driven, illustrated in the zone map.
714 MULTIMEDIA
Once properly set, the compass will automatically com- “YES” button on the touchscreen and complete one or
pensate for the differences when calibrated, and provide more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
the most accurate compass headings. metallic objects). A message will appear on the touch-
screen when the compass has been successfully cali-
brated.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the rear view
mirror, such as Mobile Phones, Laptops and Radar De-
tectors. This is where the compass module is located, and
it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it
may give false readings.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
Compass Variance Zone Map • Equalizer
• Compass Calibration When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Press “Compass Calibration” on the touchscreen to enter Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–”
calibration. To start calibration of the compass, press the
MULTIMEDIA 715
setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any • Surround Sound — If Equipped
point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
touchscreen.
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off”.
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
• Loudness — If Equipped
directly on the desired setting.
Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To
• Balance/Fade
make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” The button will
Fade settings. highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.
• Speed Adjusted Volume • AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen. To make your selection, press the “AUX Volume Offset”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off”. 10
716 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth • Subscription Information
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
touchscreen the following settings will be available: limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
• Paired Phones with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
This feature shows which phones are paired to the the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect Manual Supplement. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch- reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
screen, the following settings will be available: the screen or visit the provider online.
• Channel Skip
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of and is available for U.S. residents only.
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
MULTIMEDIA 717
Restore Settings Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button
touchscreen the following settings will be available: on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
• Restore Settings able:
• Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will reset all settings to
their default settings. To restore the settings to their When this feature is selected it will remove all personal
default setting, press the “Restore Settings” button. A data including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove
pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”
reset your settings to default?” select “OK” to restore, button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure
“Cancel” or “X” to exit without making changes. Once you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to clear,
the settings are restored, a pop up appears stating “Cancel” or “X” to exit without making changes. Once
⬙Settings reset to default.⬙ the data has been cleared, a pop up appears stating
⬙Personal data cleared”.
10
718 MULTIMEDIA
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect Press the “Apps ” button, then press the “Settings
8.4 Settings ” button on the touchscreen to display the menu
setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system
allows you to access all of the available programmable
features.
NOTE:
• Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
• Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings
may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting “option”
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
Uconnect 8.4 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons
On The Faceplate
that setting has been selected. Once the setting is com-
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen plete, either press the Back Arrow button on the touch-
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate screen to return to the previous menu, or press the “X”
button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings
MULTIMEDIA 719
screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the • Forward Collision Sensitivity
right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) This means the
down through the available settings.
system will warn you of a possible collision with the
KeySense vehicle in front of you. The feature can be set to Near,
Medium, or Far.
The vehicle’s KeySense settings are protected by a unique
4-digit PIN, which the vehicle owner creates when ac- • Forward Collision Warning Active Braking
cessing the specific settings for the first time. This 4-digit
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
PIN can only be rest by an authorized dealer.
When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional
After pressing the “KeySense” button on the touchscreen brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient
the following settings will be available: brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The
• Forward Collision Warning ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). The
system can be enabled or disabled by pressing “Forward
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an Collision Warning Active Braking” button on the touch-
audible and/or visual warning to potential forward screen.
collisions. The feature can be set to Near, Medium, or Far.
10
720 MULTIMEDIA
• ParkSense — If Equipped • Rear ParkSense Volume
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in RE- HIGH. The KeySense default volume setting is ME-
VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph DIUM. To make your selection, press the “Rear
(11 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only, ParkSense Vol.” button on the touchscreen, until a check-
or Sound and Display. To change the ParkSense status, mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
press and release the checkbox for “Sound” or “Sound had been selected. ParkSense will retain its last known
and Display.” configuration state through ignition cycles.
• Front ParkSense Volume • Rear ParkSense Braking Assist
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and When this feature is selected, the ParkSense system will
HIGH. The KeySense default volume setting is ME- detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize
DIUM. To make your selection, press the “Front autonomous braking to help stop the vehicle (only en-
ParkSense Vol.” button on the touchscreen, until a check- abled when ParkSense is also on). The system can be
mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting enabled or disabled by pressing the “Rear ParkSense
has been selected. ParkSense will retain its last known Braking Assist” button on the touchscreen, until a check-
configuration state through ignition cycles. mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
had been selected.
MULTIMEDIA 721
• Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected,
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and
will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors. • Maximum Vehicle Speed
When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind
To set the maximum vehicle speed, press the “+” or “-”
Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the button to select from 65/70/75/80/85 MPH (90/95/100/
exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn 105/110 km/h).
signal is on. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, press
the “Lights” or “Lights & Chime” button on the touch- • SiriusXM Setup
screen. • Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to skip channels. To
make your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button
on the touchscreen, select the channels you would 10
like to skip.
722 MULTIMEDIA
• Subscription Information Display
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio the following settings will be available:
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information • Display Mode
on the Subscription Information screen to re- When in this display you may select one of the display
subscribe. mode settings. To change Mode status, press and release
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen the “Manual” or “Auto” button on the touchscreen.
to access the Subscription Information screen. • Display Brightness With Headlights ON
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To When in this display, you may select the brightness with
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the headlights on. Adjust the brightness from (1–10) with
the screen or visit the provider online. the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
and is available for U.S. residents only. Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
⬙parade⬙ positions.
MULTIMEDIA 723
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navi-
gation system (if equipped). Press the “Set Language”
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
button on the touchscreen, then press the desired lan-
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness from (1–10) with
guage button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
appears next to the language, showing that setting has
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with been selected.
Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and • Touchscreen Beep
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
⬙parade⬙ positions. When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touchscreen button (button on the
• Set Theme
touchscreen) is pressed. Press the “Touchscreen Beep”
When in this display, you may select the theme for the button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears
display screen. To make your selection, press the ⬙Set next to the setting, showing that setting has been se-
Theme⬙ button on the touchscreen, then select the desired lected.
theme option button until a check-mark appears showing • Control Screen Time-Out — If Equipped
that the setting has been selected.
When this feature is selected, the Controls Screen will 10
• Set Language
stay open for five seconds before the screen times out.
When in this display, you may select one of multiple With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open
languages (English / Français / Español) for all display until it is manually closed. Press the “Control Screen
724 MULTIMEDIA
Time-Out” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark • Speed
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
Select from: “MPH” or “km/h.”
selected.
• Distance
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
Select from: “mi” or “km.”
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the Driver Information Display (DID) as • Fuel Consumption
the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a pro- Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km” or
grammed route. To make your selection, press the “Navi- “km/L.”
gation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” button on the touch-
screen, until a check-mark appears next to the setting, • Pressure
showing that setting has been selected. Select from: “psi,” “kPa,” or “bar.”
Units • Temperature
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you Select from: “°C,” or “°F.”
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
in the Driver Information Display (DID), and navigation
system (if equipped). The following selectable units of
measure are listed below:
MULTIMEDIA 725
Voice Clock
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available: following settings will be available:
• Voice Response Length • Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re- This feature will allow you to automatically have the
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press
Length, press the “Brief” or “Detailed” button on the the “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen until
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting, showing that setting has been selected. setting has been selected.
• Show Command List • Set Time Hours
When in this display, you may change the Show Com- This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync
mand List settings. To change the Show Command List time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
settings, press the “Always,” “With Help” or “Never” unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or
10
next to the setting, showing that setting has been se- down.
lected.
726 MULTIMEDIA
• Set Time Minutes Safety & Driving Assistance
This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button
“Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–” able:
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or • Forward Collision On/Off — If Equipped
down.
The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows the system
• Time Format to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
This feature will allow you to select the time format front of you. The forward collision button is located in
display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the the Uconnect display in the controls settings. To turn the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the 12hrs FCW system OFF, push the forward collision button once
or 24hrs setting, showing that setting has been selected. to turn the system OFF. To turn the FCW system back
ON, push the forward collision button again to turn the
• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped system ON. Changing the FCW status to “OFF” prevents
This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the the system from warning you of a possible collision with
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time the vehicle in front of you.
Status setting press the “Show Time in Status Bar” button The FCW system state is kept in memory from one
on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it
setting, showing that setting has been selected. will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
MULTIMEDIA 727
• Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make
your selection, press the “Forward Collision Warning
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an
Active Braking” button on the touchscreen, until a check-
audible and/or visual warning to potential forward
mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
collisions. The feature can be can be set to Far, Med or
had been selected.
Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This
means the system will warn you of a possible collision • LaneSense Warning — If Equipped
with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which
away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential
the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to
setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you provide either an “Early,” “Medium,” or “Late” warning
are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change zone start point.
the FCW status, press and release the “Near” or “Far”
button. • LaneSense Strength — If Equipped
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) — Active Braking When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The amount of directional torque the steering system can 10
When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient departure can be set at “Low,” “Medium” or “High.”
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The
728 MULTIMEDIA
• ParkSense — If Equipped indicating that the setting had been selected. ParkSense
will retain its last known configuration state through
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the
ignition cycles.
vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in RE-
VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph • Rear ParkSense Volume
(18 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or The Rear ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be se-
visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The lected from the Uconnect System. The chime volume
system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory
Display. To change the ParkSense status, press and re- default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make your selec-
lease the “Sound Only” or “Sound and Display” button. tion, press the “Rear ParkSense Vol.” button on the
• Front ParkSense Volume touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting had been selected. ParkSense
The Front ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be
will retain its last known configuration state through
selected from the Uconnect System. The chime volume
ignition cycles.
settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory
default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make your selec- • Rear ParkSense Braking Assist — If Equipped
tion, press the “Front ParkSense Vol.” button on the When this feature is selected, the park assist system will
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize
autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.
MULTIMEDIA 729
• Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the
exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn
When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview
signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot
mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the
RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the
Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Off,” “Lights” or
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
“Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen.
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, press the “Tilt Side NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
Mirrors in Reverse” button on the touchscreen, until a the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
setting had been selected. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
• Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
• ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines
Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected, Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see 10
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera
will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors. display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE.
When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen
730 MULTIMEDIA
display along with a caution note to “Check Entire “Controls” button on the touchscreen, the “settings”
Surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five button on the touchscreen, then the “Safety & Driving
seconds, this note will disappear. To make your selection, Assistance” button on the touchscreen. Press the
press the “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines” “Parkview Backup Camera Delay” button on the touch-
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears screen to turn the ParkView Delay ON or OFF.
next to setting, indicating that the setting had been • Surround View Camera
selected.
Displays a complete 360 degree view of the vehicle’s
• ParkView Backup Camera Delay
exterior environment while backing up. When this fea-
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera ture is selected, the Surround View Camera can be
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and enabled or disabled. To make your selection, press the
the previously viewed screen appears again. When the “Surround View Camera” button on the touchscreen,
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines the setting had been selected.
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of • Surround View Camera Delay
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into When activation occurs by pressing a button in the
“PARK” or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. “Controls” screen, the initial view will be the default
To set the ParkView Backup Camera Delay press the view (associated with current gear state). Image will be
displayed while in that gear as long as vehicle speed
MULTIMEDIA 731
remains less than 8 mph (12 km/h). When vehicle is • Sliding Door Alert
shifted into a different gear (other than ‘REVERSE’), the
When this feature is selected, a chime plays when the
image will remain displayed for 10 seconds or until
sliding door reverses or an obstacle is sensed. To make
vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), at which point it
your selection, press the “Sliding Door Alert” button on
will immediately cancel and return to the last viewed
the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to
screen.
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
• Surround View Camera Guidelines
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround View
When this feature is selected and the wipers are on, the
Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you
system will automatically activate the windshield wipers
to see active guidelines over the Surround View camera
if it senses moisture on the windshield. To make your
display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE
selection, press the “Rain Sensing Auto Wipers” button
or the Surround View button on the touchscreen is
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
pushed. The image will be displayed on the radio touch-
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
screen display. To make your selection, press the “Sur-
round View Camera Active Guidelines” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, 10
indicating that the setting had been selected.
732 MULTIMEDIA
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped • Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) When this feature is selected, it allows adjustment of the
system is active. To make your selection, press the “Hill amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine
Start Assist” button on the touchscreen, until a check- is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay setting,
mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select
had been selected. your desired time interval, and choose either 0, 30, 60 or
90 seconds.
• Brake Service
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
This feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle
owner to utilize a vehicle integrated, menu driven sys- When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
tem, to command the electric park brake retraction, to and remain on for 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds when the doors
service the rear foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers, are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
rotors, etc.). transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select
Lights
your desired time interval.
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
MULTIMEDIA 733
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped • Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap- whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touch-
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are screen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, show-
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make ing that the setting has been selected.
your selection, press the “Headlights With Wipers” but- • Flash Lights With Lock
ton on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, showing that the setting has been selected. When this feature is selected, the hazard lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain con- or without the “Sound Horn on Lock” feature selected. To
ditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock”
Beams” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
appears next to setting, showing that the setting has been next to setting, showing that the setting has been se- 10
selected. lected.
734 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks • Flash Lights With Lock
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch- When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
screen the following settings will be available: when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
• Auto Door Locks Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob, or when using the passive
entry feature. This feature may be selected with or
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock when the without the “Sound Horn on Lock” feature selected. To
vehicle is in motion. To make your selection, press the make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock”
“Auto Door Locks” button on the touchscreen, until a button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the next to setting, showing that the setting has been se-
setting has been selected. lected.
• Auto Unlock On Exit • Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or the door locks are activated with the RKE. To make your
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To selection, press either the “Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd
make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock On Exit” Press” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
next to the setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
selected.
MULTIMEDIA 735
• Sound Horn With Remote Start NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is pro-
press the “Sound Horn with Remote Start” button on the
grammed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting,
driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press
showing that setting has been selected.
Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed,
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks touching the handle more than once will result in only
the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected,
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob
once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/
Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use
press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob UN-
RKE Key Fob).
LOCK button. You must press the RKE Key Fob UN-
LOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. • Passive Entry — If Equipped
When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the
door(s) without having to push the Remote Keyless Entry
RKE Key Fob UNLOCK button. 10
(RKE) Key Fob LOCK or UNLOCK buttons. To make
your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the
736 MULTIMEDIA
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the • Power Liftgate Alert
setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
When this feature is selected, an alert plays when the
• Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob — If Equipped power liftgate is raising or lowering. To make your
selection, press the “Power Liftgate Alert” button on the
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the
stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior
mirrors, steering column position and radio station pre-
sets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and • Hands Free Power Liftgate
exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the
When this feature is selected, hands free technology
“Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” button on the
automatically opens or closes the power liftgate. To make
your selection, press the “Hands Free Power Liftgate”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat next to the setting, showing that the setting has been
location (if Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob is set to selected.
ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob is
used to unlock the door.
MULTIMEDIA 737
• Sliding Door Alert make your selection, press the “Hands Free Power Slid-
ing Door” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
When this feature is selected, a chime plays when the
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
sliding door reverses or an obstacle is sensed. To make
been selected.
your selection, press the “Sliding Door Alert” button on
the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
setting, showing that the setting has been selected. After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the
• Flash Lights With Sliding Door touchscreen the following settings will be available:
When this feature is selected, the headlights flash when • Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
the sliding door is opening. To make your selection, press Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
the “Flash Lights With Sliding Door” button on the When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when
setting, showing that the setting has been selected. temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When tempera-
• Hands Free Power Sliding Door tures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto-On
When this feature is selected, hands free technology Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With 10
automatically opens or closes the power sliding door. To Vehicle Start” button to select from “Off,” “Remote Start”
or “All Starts” until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected.
738 MULTIMEDIA
Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen to select your desired time
interval, and choose from “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,” “5
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
minutes” or “10 minutes.”
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped • Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off. have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit Seat” button when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to Delay status press the “+” or “–” button on the touch-
setting, showing that setting has been selected. screen to select your desired time interval.
• Engine Off Power Delay Audio
When this feature is selected, the power window After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
switches, radio, Uconnect Phone system (if equipped), following settings will be available.
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if • Balance/Fade
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
to adjust, or tap the ‘C’ icon to readjust to the center.
Engine Off Power Delay setting, press the “+” or “-”
MULTIMEDIA 739
• Equalizer • Surround Sound — If Equipped
This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
touchscreen.
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match
directly on the desired setting. button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
• Loudness — If Equipped
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the
press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen.
setting, showing that the setting has been selected. 10
740 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth • Channel Skip
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the SiriusXM can be programmed to skip channels. To make
touchscreen the following settings will be available: your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
• Paired Phones touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
This feature shows which phones are paired to the • Subscription Information
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
to the “Uconnect Manual Supplement.” limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
• Paired Audio Sources with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the “Uconnect Manual Supplement.” Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch- reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
screen, the following settings will be available: the screen or visit the provider online.
MULTIMEDIA 741
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription Clear Personal Data
and is available for U.S. residents only. After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
Restore Settings able:
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the • Clear Personal Data
touchscreen the following settings will be available: When this feature is selected it will remove all personal
• Restore Settings data including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”
When this feature is selected it will reset all settings to
button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure
their default settings. To restore the settings to their
you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to clear,
default setting, press the “Restore Settings” button. A
“Cancel” or “X” to exit without making changes. Once
pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to
the data has been cleared, a pop up appears stating
reset your settings to default?” select “OK” to restore,
⬙Personal data cleared”.
“Cancel” or “X” to exit without making changes. Once
the settings are restored, a pop up appears stating
⬙Settings reset to default.⬙ 10
742 MULTIMEDIA
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen the following information will be available:
• System Information
When System Information is selected, a System Informa-
tion screen will appear displaying the system software
version.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS

The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock
Steering Wheel Audio Controls (Back View Of Steering
positions. Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
MULTIMEDIA 743
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM/ There are numerous USB ports located throughout the
AUX, etc.). vehicle. This feature allows an external USB device to be
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a plugged into the USB port.
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand For further information, refer to the Uconnect Supple-
control is different depending on which mode you are in. ment Manual.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro- 10
grammed in the radio preset button.
744 MULTIMEDIA
• In the center console
• On the back of the front row seats in the Uconnect
Theater Media hubs
• Above the rear cup holders in the third row of seats
Front Center Stack AUX Jack And USB Ports

1 — USB Port
2 — Aux Jack
3 — Uconnect Theater USB Port
There are multiple USB “charge only” ports in this Center Console USB Charging Port
vehicle.
MULTIMEDIA 745
UCONNECT THEATER — IF EQUIPPED
Your Uconnect Theater is designed to give your family
years of enjoyment.
There are multiple ways to interact with your Uconnect
Theater system.
• Play your favorite CDs, DVDs or Blu-ray Discs
• Plug and play a variety of standard video games or
devices into the HDMI port
• Listen to audio over the wireless headphones
Rear USB Charging Ports • Plug and play a variety of devices into the Video USB
NOTE: The USB “Charge Only” ports will recharge port
battery operated USB devices when connected.
• Plug in standard headphones to listen to audio
Please review this Owner’s Manual to become familiar 10
with its features and operation.
746 MULTIMEDIA
Getting Started There are three different ways to operate the features of
the Uconnect Theater:
• The Remote Control
• The Touchscreen Radio
• The Individual Video Screens
Uconnect Theater Screen

1 — Uconnect Theater Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Radio
3 — Uconnect Theater Media Hub
MULTIMEDIA 747
Accessing The System From The Uconnect Radio You can access your Uconnect Theater system from the
radio touchscreen following the steps below:
1. Press the “Media” button.
2. Press the “Uconnect Theater” button icon.
NOTE: The Uconnect Theater icon may be dragged and
dropped down to the personalized menu bar to create an
App/shortcut. Refer to “Personalized Menu Bar” in this
section for more information.
Uconnect Theater Button
10
748 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect Theater Controls Parents can control certain features of the system with the
“Uconnect Theater Controls” screens, right from the
Uconnect touchscreen radio. Options are:
• Change media sources
• Lock one or both screens
• Mute an individual screen or both screens
• Turn On/Off one or both screens
• Select APPS
• View media while gear selector is in Park
Uconnect Theater Controls Screen

1 — Power All 5 — Lock On/Off current screen
2 — Mute All 6 — Mute On/Off current
3 — Lock All screen
4 — Source Drop Down List 7 — Power On/Off current
screen
MULTIMEDIA 749
Accessing The System From The Uconnect
Theater Rear Screens
You can also access your Uconnect Theater system from
the rear screens from the steps below:
1. Lift screen upward, the system will automatically
power on.
NOTE: A message asking if you would like to pair a
remote will pop up if one has not already been paired to
the system.
2. If “YES” is selected to Pair a Remote, Pairing will
Listen In immediately start.
Press this button and use the “Listen In” feature to listen
3. If “NO” is selected, the Uconnect Theater home screen
to audio through cabin speakers.
will pop up.
10
750 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: Pairing The Remote
• There will be a touchscreen notification message when
pairing is successful. Repeat the above steps to pair the
second remote.
• If remote is ever non-operational, try pairing remote.
When watching a video source, pushing “Settings”
icon on the touchscreen activates the Settings
menu. These settings control the appearance of the
video on the screen. The factory default settings are
already set for optimum viewing, so there is no need
to change these settings under normal circumstances.
To change the settings, use one of the touchscreens. To
reset all values back to the original settings, select the Remote Pairing
“Reset to Defaults” then select “YES.” If the remote needs to be paired to your Uconnect Theater
system, follow the procedure below:
1. Press the “Settings” icon on the touchscreen.
MULTIMEDIA 751
2. Press the “Remote” button on the touchscreen in the will need to be unpaired from your Uconnect Theater
settings menu. system. To unpair the remote, follow the procedure
below:
3. Select “Pair Remote” and follow the on screen instruc-
tions to complete the pairing process. 1. Select “Manage Remote Controls” from the Remote
section of ⬙Settings and follow the on screen instruc-
NOTE:
tions to complete the unpairing process.
• There will be a touchscreen notification message when
2. Push and hold the “Screen”, “Down Arrow”, and
pairing is successful/unsuccessful. Repeat the above
“Play/Pause” buttons for 5 seconds, or until the
steps to pair the second remote.
remote screen indicator light flashes.
• If remote is ever non-operational, try pairing remote.
3. Once complete, the remote will be ready to pair again.
• The system can accommodate up to 10 paired remote
NOTE: There will be a touchscreen notification message
controls.
when unpairing is successful. Repeat the above steps to
Unpairing The Remote unpair a second remote.
In events such as updating the Uconnect Theater soft- 10
ware, or taking a remote to another vehicle, the remote
752 MULTIMEDIA
Media Sources Users can select content for each screen from the radio by
choosing desired content from drop down menu.
NOTE: Use the “View Screen” function to pull content
from one screen to the other in a single press of a button.
Doing this however will disable and gray out certain
player controls on the screen viewing the other screen’s
content.
Media Sources
1 – Available Sources Screen 1
2 – USB Source Playing Screen 2
MULTIMEDIA 753
Uconnect Theater Remote Control 2. Mute Button — Mutes headphone audio.
3. Home Button — Push to access “Sources”.
4. Arrow Buttons — Push the arrow but-
tons to highlight an item or scroll through menus.
5. Fast Forward Button — Push and hold to fast
forward through the current audio track or video
chapter. Push once to skip to the next track.
6. Play/Pause Button 㥋 — Begin/resume or pause
disc play.
7. Fast Rewind Button — Push and hold to fast
rewind through the current audio track or video
chapter. Push once to revert back to the previous
Remote Control
track.
1. Gesture Pad — Control mouse pointer position in this
area to move and select items on the touchscreen, 8. OK Button — Push to select the highlighted option in 10
functions similar to a mouse. a menu.
754 MULTIMEDIA
9. Screen Selector Button — Push the screen selector to NOTE: Perchlorate Material — special handling may
toggle between screen 1 (Driver Side), or screen 2 apply. Visit dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
(Passenger Side).
To replace the batteries:
10. Back Button — Push to exit out of menus or return to
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
previous screen.
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
11. Power Button — Turns the screen and wireless
2. Remove the old batteries and follow battery recycling
headphone transmitter for the selected Channel on or
procedures for your area.
off.
3. Install new batteries, making sure to orient them
12. Screen Indicator — Indicates which screen (1 or 2) is
according to the polarity diagram shown inside the
being controlled by the remote control when a button
battery compartment.
is pushed.
4. Replace the battery compartment cover.
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
Each remote control requires two AAA batteries for
operation.
MULTIMEDIA 755
Uconnect Theater Home Screen And Controls
Uconnect Theater Home Screen Source Card Selection

1 — Search Button (Media 5 — Source Card Page Indica- You can choose sources such as HDMI, USB, Apps, or
Search) tor 1 or 2 Blu-ray. You may also view content of the opposite screen
2 — Power Button 6 — Wired Headphone Volume
3 — Settings Button 7 — Climate Control Button
in one step by choosing the “View Screen” source card.
10
4 — Toggle Button List and 8 — Home Button
Icon View 9 — Source Cards
756 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: NOTE: System information can also be displayed under
General Settings.
• Source card order can be changed by pressing the
Settings button on the touchscreen and scrolling down Remote Settings
to ⬙Source Card Order⬙. Under this setting, you can access the following:
• Use the “View Screen” function to pull content from • Manage Remotes
one screen to the other. Doing this however will
disable and gray out certain player controls. • Remote sensitivity (This adjusts the speed and sensi-
tivity of cursor on screen when using gesture pad)
General Settings
Play A DVD/Blu-ray Or USB Media File From
To change source card order, select “Source Card Reor-
Uconnect Radio
der”, then press and hold source card on the touchscreen,
and drag and drop in desired order. 1. Insert a Blu-ray disc or DVD disc into the disc player
with the label facing up. Or insert a USB drive into
You can also adjust the following below and more.
rear Video USB port.
• Brightness
NOTE: The DVD/Blu-ray Disc player is located under
• Media port lighting on and off the radio controls in the instrument panel.
• Clock on and off
MULTIMEDIA 757
2. Press the “Uconnect Theater” button on the touch-
screen. Refer to “Accessing The System From The
Uconnect Radio” in this section for further informa-
tion.
3. Select Disc or USB from the source controls on the
desired screen (1 or 2).
NOTE: To play a DVD/Blu-ray disc on both screens
simultaneously, select disc from both screen drop downs.
4. Press “Play” button on the touchscreen.
DVD Blu-ray Disc Player

1 — Disc Player (Rear)
2 — Rear Video USB Port
10
758 MULTIMEDIA
Using The Touchscreen Radio
Source Controls — Uconnect Radio

Media Control Screen
NOTE: Control functions apply to individual screen
selected displayed on touchscreen.
MULTIMEDIA 759
1. Power NOTE: Viewing a Blu-ray disc on the radio screen is not
Press to turn “selected Screen” On/Off. available in all states/provinces, and the vehicle must be
stopped, and the gear selector must be in the PARK
2. Mute position for vehicles with automatic transmission.
Mute rear headphones for selected source for the current Blu-ray Controls – Disc Specific Functions
ignition cycle. Pressing mute again will unmute rear
headphones. The four colored buttons (red, green, blue, yellow) are
designed for use with certain Blu-ray disc movie titles to
3. Lock access particular features or software on the disc. See the
Press to enable/disable Remote Control functions and documentation provided with your Blu-ray disc movie to
Touchscreen Controls for the selected source. see if these buttons can be used.
4. View
Select this button to full screen video if vehicle is not
moving. Button is disabled when not viewing a video
source or when the vehicle is in motion.
10
To view a Blu-ray disc on the radio select the “View”
button while in the selected screen controls, then select
the Disc source from drop down menu.
760 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect Theater Apps
Blu-ray Controls – Disc Specific Functions

1 — Red Button 3 — Blue Button
2 — Green Button 4 — Yellow Button Apps Home Screen
MULTIMEDIA 761
• Hanging Fruit
• License Plate Game
• Math Flash Cards
• Solitaire
• Sudoku
• Tic Tac Toe
NOTE: To exit a game, push “Exit Button” than “Back
Arrow,” or “Home Button” on the touchscreen.
Home Screen
Select the Apps source card to play pre-loaded games.
Pressing the “Help” button teaches users how to play
each game. Pick from games:
10
• Back Seat Bingo
• Checkers
762 MULTIMEDIA
Are We There Yet?
When a navigation route has been set from the Uconnect
radio the second row passengers can use “Are We There
Yet?” for an animated screen showing distance and time
remaining on navigation routes as well as the estimated
time of arrival with pop-up notifications. Notifications
and frequency can be set up for route information while
in other Uconnect Theater screens too.
NOTE: Route notifications will pop-up at the bottom of
the screen in the center.
Are We There Yet?

MULTIMEDIA 763
Using The Rear Video USB Port NOTE: To view USB media on the rear theater screens,
insert a USB jump drive into the port on the DVD/Blu-
ray disc player. The USB jump drive port is located under
the radio controls in the instrument panel.
Rear Video USB Port

Plug in a jump drive, iPhone, iPod or mass storage device
and play your favorite music or movies. 10
Search Screen
Use the search feature to find your music faster.
764 MULTIMEDIA
Play Video Games
Connect the video game console to the HDMI 1 or 2
ports, located behind the first row seat.
AUX/HDMI/USB
1 — AUX Jack (Headphone Output Only)
2 — HDMI Port
3 — USB Port (Charge Only)
MULTIMEDIA 765
CAUTION!
Certain high-end video games will exceed the power
limit of the vehicle’s Power Inverter. Refer to “Power
Inverter” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” in this
guide for further information.
Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screens.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on, the channel is not Uconnect Theater Headphones
muted and the headphone channel selector button is on
1 — Power ON/OFF Button
the desired channel. If audio is still not heard, check that 2 — Volume Control Wheel
two new AAA type batteries are installed in the head- 3 — Channel Selection Button
phones. 10
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.
766 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: Uconnect Theater must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
approximately three minutes after the Uconnect Theater
system is turned off.
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
1. Ensure the remote control and the headphones are on
the same channel.
2. Push the Home button on the remote control.
3. When the Home menu appears on the touchscreen,
use the arrow buttons on the remote control to navi- Headphone Channel Selector Button
gate to the available modes and push the OK button to Replacing The Headphone Batteries
select the new mode or use the Gesture Pad at the top
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
of the remote control.
operation.
NOTE: Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. Visit dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
MULTIMEDIA 767
To replace the batteries: How Long Does the Coverage Last? This warranty lasts
as long as you own the Product.
1. Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
downward. below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal
use is defective in workmanship or materials.
2. Remove the old batteries and follow battery recycling
procedures for your area. What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty
does not cover any damage or defect that results from
3. Install new batteries, making sure to orient them
misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than
according to the polarity diagram shown inside the
by Delphi Automotive. Foam earpieces, which will wear
battery compartment.
over time through normal use, are specifically not cov-
4. Replace the battery compartment cover. ered (replacement foam is available for a nominal
charge). DELPHI AUTOMOTIVE IS NOT LIABLE FOR
Delphi Automotive Stereo Headphone Lifetime
ANY INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROP-
Limited Warranty
ERTY RESULTING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAIL-
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers URE OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS DELPHI
the initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this AUTOMOTIVE LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL, SPE- 10
particular Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wireless CIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSE-
headphone (⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transferable. QUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER
768 MULTIMEDIA
DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WHATSO- If you have any questions or comments regarding your
EVER. Some states and jurisdictions may not allow the Delphi Automotive wireless headphones, please phone
exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential 1-888-293-3332.
damages, so the above limitation may not apply to you.
You may register your Delphi Automotive wireless head-
This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may
phones by phone at 1-888-293-3332.
also have other rights, which vary from jurisdiction to
jurisdiction. Disc Menu
What Will Delphi Automotive Do? Delphi Automotive, When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pushing
at its option, will repair or replace any defective Product. the remote control’s arrow buttons will navigate the
Delphi Automotive reserves the right to replace any cursor on the rear touchscreen for whichever touchscreen
discontinued Product with a comparable model. THIS is selected.
WARRANTY IS THE SOLE WARRANTY FOR THIS NOTE: Inserting a disc into the player will “auto play”
PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY the disc if already in the ⬙Disc⬙ source menu on the rear
REGARDING DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS, AND IS IN screens.
LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES (EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY FOR MER-
CHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
MULTIMEDIA 769
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed Rear Climate Controls
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the The rear climate controls can also be controlled using the
screen closed: Uconnect Theater system. Refer to “Climate Controls” in
“Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
• Close the video screen.
• When the screen is reopened, the video screen will
automatically turn back on and show the appropriate
display menu or media.
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, push
the remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If
audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries 10
are installed in the headphones. Rear Climate Controls
770 MULTIMEDIA
General Information Regulatory And Safety Information
The operation is subject to the following two conditions: USA/CANADA
1. This device may not cause harmful interference. Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
2. This device must accept any interference that may be The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio
received including interference that may cause unde- is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits.
sired operation. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES body.
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from found in radio frequency safety standards and recom-
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated mendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is community.
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emit-
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
ted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However,
not using Uconnect (if equipped).
the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
MULTIMEDIA 771
situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
for authorization before turning on the wireless radio. communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). • If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
2. This device must accept any interference received, more of the following measures:
including interference that may cause undesired op-
1. Increase the separation between the equipment and
eration.
receiver.
NOTE:
2. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio techni-
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply cian for help.
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to 10
provide reasonable protection against harmful inter-
ference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy
772 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these help-
ful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and
tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0, 8.4 or
8.4 NAV system.
Uconnect 5.0
MULTIMEDIA 773
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing in-
structions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger con-
versations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
Uconnect 8.4 NAV

If you see the icon on your touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect 8.4 NAV system. If not, you have a
Uconnect 8.4 system.
10
774 MULTIMEDIA
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons

1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Re-
ceive A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media functions. For
8.4 Only: Push To Begin Navigation, Apps And Climate Func-
tions.
3 — Push To End Call
MULTIMEDIA 775
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, sayѧ
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen. Uconnect 5.0
10
776 MULTIMEDIA
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-
tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, sayѧ
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you with
Uconnect 8.4
a list of commands.
MULTIMEDIA 777
Uconnect 5.0 Radio Uconnect 8.4 Radio
10
778 MULTIMEDIA
Media TIP: Press the “Browse” button on the touchscreen to see
all of the music on your AUX or USB device. Your Voice
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
song and genre information is displayed.
available for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to AUX
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
Uconnect 5.0 Media

MULTIMEDIA 779
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illumi-
nated for the Uconnect 5.0 and 8.4/8.4 NAV radios, your
system is ready. Visit UconnectPhone.com for mobile
phone compatibility and pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button . After the beep, say one of
the following commandsѧ
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
Uconnect 8.4 Media
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
10
780 MULTIMEDIA
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect 8.4 Phone
Uconnect 5.0 Phonebook

MULTIMEDIA 781
Voice Text Reply PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
the Phone button and say Listen. (Must have com- Start without
patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.) No. I’ll be late.
me.
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push Okay. Where are you? I will be <num-
the Phone button and say . After the beep, say: Are you there ber> minutes
“Reply.” Call me. late.
yet?
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat I’ll call you I need See you in
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system later. directions. <number> of
prompts. I’m on my way. Can’t talk right minutes.
I’m lost. now. Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa-
tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advan-
tage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
10
UconnectPhone.com.
782 MULTIMEDIA
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
iPhone Notification Settings

1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
4 — Turn on “Show Notifications”
MULTIMEDIA 783
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
use your voice to send a text message. Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
Climate
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-
free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate
control.)
following commands:
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
10
Uconnect 8.4 Climate
784 MULTIMEDIA
Navigation TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button . After
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on
the Uconnect 8.4 system. See your dealer to activate
navigation at any time.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button . After
the beep, say:
• For the 8.4 Uconnect System, say: “Enter state.”
• For the 8.4 NAV Uconnect System, say: “Find ad-
dress 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
Uconnect 8.4 Navigation

MULTIMEDIA 785
Uconnect Access Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
WARNING! 9-1-1 Call
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the Security Alarm Notification
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X Remote Door Lock/Unlock
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection. Stolen Vehicle Assistance
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho- Remote Vehicle Start**
rized by the subscriber. Remote Horn and Lights
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take Yelp Search
advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next
Voice Texting
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get Roadside Assistance Call
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found WiFi Hotspot***
on the next page. 10
**If vehicle is equipped.
NOTE: Uconnect Access is available only on equipped
***Extra charges apply.
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
786 MULTIMEDIA
Register 3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your
vehicle and handle all of the details.
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your
vehicle, you first need to register with Uconnect Access. Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or,
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror. press the “Apps ” button on the touchscreen to
“Register By Web” to complete the process using your
smartphone or computer.
For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com.
Vehicle Health Alert
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a
problem under the hood with one of your vehicles key
systems. For further information go to the Mopar Owner
Connect website moparownerconnect.com.
Mobile App
You’re only a few steps away from using remote com-
Assist Button mands and playing your favorite music in your vehicle.
2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the touchscreen.
MULTIMEDIA 787
3. Press the app you’d like to connect to your vehicle.
4. Enter your login information for the selected app and
press Link.
5. Next time you’re in your vehicle, enable Bluetooth,
pair your phone and select the Via Mobile app you
want to play from the Uconnect touchscreen to stream
your personalized music.
NOTE:
• You can also complete this process on the web. Simply
visit moparownerconnect.com log in and click Set Up
Mobile App Via Mobile Profile (under Quick Links).
To link your internet radio accounts:
• Once you download the app to your compatible
1. Download the Uconnect Access App to your mobile mobile device, you will also be able to start your
device. vehicle and lock/unlock its doors from virtually any- 10
where.
2. Press the Via Mobile icon on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app.
788 MULTIMEDIA
Voice Texting You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a
compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice
1. To send a message, push the Phone button . After
to send a personalized text message. For details about
the beep, say the following command: “Send mes-
MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
sage to John Smith.”
Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
process your message.
3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy
with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
MULTIMEDIA 789
TIP:
• Voice Texting is not compatible with iPhone, but if
your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
use your voice to send a text message.
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
illuminated to use the feature.
iPhone Notification Settings

1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
4 — Turn on “Show Notifications” 10
790 MULTIMEDIA
Yelp TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or
Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your
Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you. Please refer to the procedure below to
launch a Yelp search:
1. Push the VR button . After the beep, say: Launch
YELP.
2. Once the YELP home screen appears on the touch-
screen, push the VR button , then say: YELP
search.
3. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Uconnect the place or business that you’d like
Uconnect to find.
Yelp
MULTIMEDIA 791
SiriusXM Travel Link
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,
check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?
SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a
wealth of information right to your Uconnect 8.4 NAV
system. (Not available for 8.4 system.)
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
SiriusXM Travel Link
• Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Com-
mand.
10
792 MULTIMEDIA
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select
media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your
natural language to understand what you mean and will
respond back to confirm your requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands
on the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful
tasks.
To enable Siri push and hold, then release the Uconnect
Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel.
After you hear a double beep you can ask Siri to play
podcasts and music, get directions, read text messages Siri Eyes Free Available
and many other useful requests. Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes
MULTIMEDIA 793
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your conve- While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
nience there is a counter display to keep track of your so you can still place a second call without being inter-
missed calls and text messages while you were using Do rupted by incoming calls.
Not Disturb.
NOTE:
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iP-
message, a call or both, when declining an incoming call
and send it to voicemail. hones.
Automatic reply messages can be: • Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP.
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 charac-
ters.
NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can been seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
10
794 MULTIMEDIA
General Information • The term IC before the certification/registration num-
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following fications were met.
two conditions: Additional Information
1. This device may not cause harmful interference. © 2015 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
received including interference that may cause unde-
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
sired operation.
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,
NOTE: Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered
trademarks of Yelp.
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
MULTIMEDIA 795
Uconnect System Support: 2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
• U.S. residents call 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7
days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com 3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
• Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET 5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
Sun., Closed 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
Uconnect Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241 Please 7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you call. too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coat-
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following ing removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
precautions: oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known 10
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the good disc before considering disc player service.
surface.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .798 Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .800
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .798 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .800
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .798 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .802
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .798 䡵 MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .802
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .798 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .802
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .799 ▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .802
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . . . . .799
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .803
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .800
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .803 11
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands . . . . . . . .800
798 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Be Reasonable With Requests
YOUR VEHICLE If you list a number of items and you must have your
Prepare For The Appointment vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
work to be performed may not be covered by the
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
for an appointment.
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know. authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 799
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- FCA US LLC Customer Center
solved with this process. P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance. Phone: (800) 247-9753
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office) 11
In Mexico Contact Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
Mexico, D. F. cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
In Mexico City: 5081-7568 center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300 (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
P.O. Box 191857
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
San Juan 00919-1857 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
Tel.: (787) 782-5757 a Bell Relay Service operator.
Fax: (787) 782-3345 Service Contract

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only We appreciate that you have made a major investment
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
have any questions about the service contract, call the sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer concerns.
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French). WARNING!
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
is not responsible for any service contract other than the nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser- of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the nent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
those documents. or other reproductive harm. 11
WARRANTY INFORMATION If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
individual problems between you, your authorized
MOPAR PARTS dealer, and the manufacturer.
MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom- Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
operating at its best. trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
You can also obtain other information about motor
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
In Canada Service Manuals
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
should contact the Customer Service Department imme- mation that students and professional technicians need in
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans- ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ and/or components is written in straightforward lan-
roadsafety/ guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form. features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes). 11
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals Call toll free at:
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the • 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
quaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included
are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro- Or
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
tips.
• www.techauthority.com
INDEX
12
806 INDEX
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .409 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .632 Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231, 342, 375
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678 Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Adjust Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .625
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325, 342 Air Conditioning, Rear Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130, 143
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625, 626
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . .341, 608 Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . .124, 132, 625
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . .345, 609 Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 Alarm
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334 Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .344 Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . .343 Alarm (Security Alarm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240, 261
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
INDEX 807
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631, 686 Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634 Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235, 620
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Audio Systems (Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694 Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .26
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .132 Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396, 639 Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639, 689 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637, 638 Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637, 689 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .194 Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636, 689
12
808 INDEX
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636 Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 Changing A Flat Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559, 639
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Bulbs, Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377, 537, 543 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Child Restraints
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494, 497 Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686 Center Seat LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Caps, Filler Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502, 599 Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365, 367
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633 How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . .363
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374, 681 Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
Cargo Compartment Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . .354
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669 Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . .350
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .770 Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
INDEX 809
Using The Top Tether Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . .369 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678 Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
Cleaning Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630, 634
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
Coat Hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192 Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . .631, 686, 687
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .795 Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659 Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Computer, Trip/Travel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256, 259, 260
Connector Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .798
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .743 Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .697
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . .743
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .800 Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .633 Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632 Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129, 376
12
810 INDEX
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .194
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Dipsticks Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605 Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Disposal Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . .405, 409
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241, 242 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241, 242 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . .238
Door Locks Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . .494, 497
Key Fob Emergency Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Change Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . .215
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Setup
Driving Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing EVIC Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524 Emergency, In Case Of
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) . . . . . . .745 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559, 562, 639
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
INDEX 811
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Engine Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386 Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . .341, 608
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679, 682
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374, 681
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374, 628
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687 Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110, 377, 537, 543
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374, 681
Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 Filters
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622, 686, 687 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624, 687
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622, 686 Flashers
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624 Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
12
812 INDEX
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254, 377, 542 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Front Position Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Flexible Fuel Vehicles Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684 Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682, 683 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679, 682
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686 Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677, 687
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
Fluid Level Checks Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636 Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113, 544 Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Fold in Floor (Stow ⬘N Go) Seating . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . .175, 182
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
INDEX 813
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
.678
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
.678
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
.398
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
.672
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
.507
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .115
.507
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
.504
Hitches
Hazard Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow HomeLink (Garage Door Opener). . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524 Hood Prop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Headlights Hook, Coat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104, 529
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214, 239, 246, 254
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Interior And Instrument Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
12
814 INDEX
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .121 LaneSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
iPod/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .743 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560 Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559, 639 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377, 543
Light Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Key Fob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231, 342, 375
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Keyless Enter-N-Go Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .734 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .734 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537, 543
INDEX 815
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256, 259, 260 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377, 543 Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542, 543
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113, 544 SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Front Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . .251, 293
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254, 377, 542
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .254
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168, 504
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Load Shed
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Battery Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247 Battery Saver On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .250 Electrical Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .120 Intelligent Battery Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
12
816 INDEX
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676 Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104, 529
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620 Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109, 192
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . . . . .250 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .803 MOPAR Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .802
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
Marker Lights, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90, 107
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel). . . . . . . . . . . . .677, 687
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622, 687
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624, 687
INDEX 817
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624 Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623 ParkSense System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436, 447
Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624 Personalized Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622, 686 Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .644
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624 Power
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623, 686 Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .194
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84, 87
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 Power Seats
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104, 106 Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600 Pretensioners
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .4, 803 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652

12
818 INDEX
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .633 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Radio Frequency Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 36 Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .770 Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .742 Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Rear Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130, 143 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .742
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494, 497 Remote Starting
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285 Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436, 447 Uconnect Customer Programmable
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36, 712, 737
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36, 712, 737
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .802
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Remote Control Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
INDEX 819
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 Seat Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304, 375
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .802 Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . .311
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304, 306, 309
Seat Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . .311 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . .318 Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58, 85, 94
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58, 59, 63, 85
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 Fold in Floor (Stow ⬘n Go) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
12
820 INDEX
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84, 87 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560, 659, 660, 661
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 63 Specifications
Stow ⬘N Go (Fold in Floor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 63 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 Speed Control
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Accel/Decel (ACC Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687 Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .798 Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .800 Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . .405, 409
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .803 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 383
Shifting Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113, 254, 377, 542 Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
INDEX 821
Steering Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . .644
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377, 649, 659, 664
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .742 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .742 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559, 639
Stow ⬘N Go (Fold in Floor) Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659
Stow n VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649, 659
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag. . . . . . . . .322 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559, 562, 639
Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644, 645
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . .220, 293
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .132 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
12
822 INDEX
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663 Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639, 649 Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658 Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560, 659, 660, 661 Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654 Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654 Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639 Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514 Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396, 637
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .521 Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .26
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523 Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . .175
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
INDEX 823
Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254, 542 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .743 Vacuum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

Uconnect Stow n VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . .36, 712, 737 Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109, 192
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36, 712, 737 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . .675
Uconnect Access Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504, 645
Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .786 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Yelp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .790 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Uconnect Settings Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . .734 Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .772
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .734
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .734 Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Uconnect Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .772 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Umbrella Holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .802
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .743 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Water
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677 Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
12
824 INDEX
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129, 376
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120, 619
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120, 121
Wrecker Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone only fully shielded coaxial cable.
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
The positive power connection should be made directly
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
normal may require special precautions.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
This connection should not be fused. ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
17RU-126-AA
©2015 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. First Edition
Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Printed in U.S.A.

2017-Pacifica Chrysler Manuel

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

2017-Pacifica Chrysler Manuel

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2017-Pacifica Chrysler Manuel

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2017

2 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 2

3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 3

4 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 4

6 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 6

7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 7

8 MAINTAINING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611 8

Three Button RKE Key Fob

First Push Unlock

Second Push Unlock

Keyless Push Button Ignition

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

• Doors closed • Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or

Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking

Push The Door Handle Button To Lock

Side Door Handle And Lock Functions

Driver Side Power Sliding Side Door Switch

Hands-Free Sliding Doors

1. Open the sliding side door. WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped

1 — Seat Height Adjustment Lever

Fold Headrest To Upward Position

Pull Strap For Third Row Passengers

Stow ‘n Go Assist — If Equipped A one-touch Stow ‘n Go Assist button is located on the

Push Panel Forward

Push Panel Forward

Extend Panel Push Down To lock

Release Strap In Floor Detent Guides

Release Strap “1”

Stowed Third Row Seat

Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped Driver Power Seat Switches

Third Row Power Seat Switch

Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped

Head Restraints — Second Row

Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped

Manual Rearview Mirror

Automatic Dimming Mirror

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This

Instrument Panel Dimmer

Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS

Rear Manual Climate Controls

Rear Climate Control/Blower Off

Uconnect 8.4 Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On

Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons On The

7. Rear Climate Control Button

Uconnect 5.0 Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display

Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If

Front Passenger Power Door Controls

TRI-PANE VISTA VIEW SUNROOF — IF

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

Hood Release Lever

Unlock Liftgate Using An RKE Key Fob

With a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 3 ft (1 m)

Hands-Free Liftgate Activation Zone

Cargo Area Features

Vacuum System Access Panels